Addendum 1 Specs

advertisement
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
(N) = Denotes Sections Newly Issued as Dated.
(R) = Denotes Sections Revised and Reissued as Dated.
(D) = Denotes Sections Deleted as Dated.
SPECIFICATIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS
(R) SEALS PAGE -07/28/2016
DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 01010 - SUMMARY OF WORK
SECTION 01025 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENTS
SECTION 01041 - PROJECT COORDINATION
SECTION 01045 - CUTTING AND PATCHING
SECTION 01050 - FIELD ENGINEERING
SECTION 01060 - REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS AND SAFETY
SECTION 01065 - RAILROAD SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 01068 - MAINTENANCE FACILITIES SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 01100 - SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES
SECTION 01200 - PROJECT PROGRESS MEETINGS
SECTION 01300 - SUBMITTALS
SECTION 01305 - REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION
SECTION 01380 - CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS
(R) SECTION 01400 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS -07/28/2016
SECTION 01410 - TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES
(R) SECTION 01500 - CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS -07/28/2016
SECTION 01505 - MOBILIZATION
SECTION 01510 - MAINTENANCE, SUPPORT AND RESTORATION OF EXISTING UTILITY FACILITIES
(R) SECTION 01570 - MAINTENANCE AND PROTECTION OF VEHICLES, PEDESTRIANS AND PASSENGERS -07/28/2016
SECTION 01580 - PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGNS AND OTHER CONSTRUCTION SIGNAGE
SECTION 01590 - SEPTA FIELD OFFICE
SECTION 01600 - MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
SECTION 01700 - CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
SECTION 01710 - FINAL CLEANING
SECTION 01720 - PROJECT AS-BUILT DOCUMENTS
SECTION 01810 - COMMISSIONING OF SYSTEMS
SECTION 01830 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
TOC - 1
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
(N) = Denotes Sections Newly Issued as Dated.
(R) = Denotes Sections Revised and Reissued as Dated.
(D) = Denotes Sections Deleted as Dated.
DIVISION 2 – SITEWORK
02050
DEMOLITION
02070
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
02085
ASBESTOS REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL
02090
LEAD CONTAINING PAINT
02091
HAZARDOUS LAMP/MERCURY/UNIVERSAL WASTE REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL
02100
SITE PREPARATION
02130
UNDERGROUND STORAGE TANK REMOVAL
02160
EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION
02170
SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL
02176
STEEL SHEET PILING
02200
EARTHWORK
02240
DEWATERING
02345
INSTRUMENTATION AND MONITORING
02367
DRILLED CAISSONS
02450
TRACKWORK
02455
RAISE, LINE AND SURFACE
02457
TIMBER TIES AND SWITCH TIES
02458
BALLAST AND SUBBALLAST
02459
RAIL FASTENERS
(R) 02466
STEEL RAIL -07/28/2016
(R) 02468
RAIL WELDING -07/28/2016
02470
AT-GRADE CROSSINGS
(R) 02475
SPECIAL TRACKWORK -07/28/2016
02510
WALKWAY AND ROADWAY PAVING-ASPHALT
02553
NATURAL GAS DISTRIBUTION
02665
WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
02715
SITE DRAINAGE SYSTEM
02730
SANITARY AND INDUSTRIAL WASTE SYSTEM
02821
CHAIN-LINK FENCES AND GATES
02930
SOIL PREPARATION for STORMWATER BMPs
TOC - 2
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
(N) = Denotes Sections Newly Issued as Dated.
(R) = Denotes Sections Revised and Reissued as Dated.
(D) = Denotes Sections Deleted as Dated.
02936
STORMWATER BMP AREA SEEDING
02970
LANDSCAPE RESTORATION for BMPs
DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE
03300
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03451
PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE
DIVISION 4 – MASONRY
(R) 04200
UNIT MASONRY -07/28/2016
DIVISION 5 – METALS
05120
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05310
STEEL DECK
05400
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
05500
METAL FABRICATIONS
05511
METAL GRATING STAIRS
05520
HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS
05530
BAR GRATING
05550
STAIR TREADS AND NOSING
DIVISION 6 – WOOD AND PLASTICS
06100
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06820
FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PRODUCTS
DIVISION 7 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07140
UNDERSLAB VAPOR RETARDER
07210
BUILDING INSULATION
07214
FOAMED-IN-PLACE-INSULATION
TOC - 3
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
(N) = Denotes Sections Newly Issued as Dated.
(R) = Denotes Sections Revised and Reissued as Dated.
(D) = Denotes Sections Deleted as Dated.
07413
STANDING SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS
07426
FABRICATED WALL PANEL SYSTEM
07510
BUILT-UP BITUMINOUS ROOFING
07620
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
07710
ROOF SPECIALITIES
(R) 07720
ROOF ACCESSORIES -07/28/2016
07840
FIRESTOPPING
07841
JOINT FIRESTOPPING
07900
JOINT SEALERS
07950
EXPANSION CONTROL
DIVISION 8 – DOORS AND WINDOWS
08100
METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
08310
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
08331
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
08410
ALUMINUM FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
(R) 08450
TRANSLUCENT PANEL WALL UNIT SYSTEM -07/28/2016
08710
DOOR HARDWARE
08800
GLAZING
DIVISION 9 – FINISHES
09260
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
09300
TILE
09510
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
(R) 09651
RESILIENT FLOOR TILE FLOORING -07/28/2016
09653
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
(R) 09900
PAINTS AND COATINGS -07/28/2016
09902
HOT DIP GALVANIZED AND PAINTED STEEL
09960
HIGH PERFORMANCE COATINGS
TOC - 4
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
(N) = Denotes Sections Newly Issued as Dated.
(R) = Denotes Sections Revised and Reissued as Dated.
(D) = Denotes Sections Deleted as Dated.
DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES
10200
LOUVERS & VENTS
10211
STAINLESS STEEL TOILET COMPARTMENTS
10240
ENTRANCE FLOOR GRATINGS
10290
PEST CONTROL
10400
IDENTIFYING DEVICES
10505
METAL LOCKERS
10522
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS AND ACCESSORIES
10800
TOILET ACCESSORIES
DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT
11000
EQUIPMENT GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
11050
PERSONNEL SCISSOR LIFTS
11100
MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT
11130
LOADING DOCK EQUIPMENT
11135
TANDEM UNDERFLOOR WHEELSET LATHE SYSTEM
11150
HOT WATER PRESSURE WASHER
11190
RELOCATING EXISTING EQUIPMENT
11680
MATERIAL STORAGE EQUIPMENT
DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS
NOT USED
DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
(R) 13120
STEEL BUILDING SYSTEMS -07/28/2016
DIVISION 14 – CONVEYING SYSTEMS
14050
FALL PROTECTION SYSTEM
TOC - 5
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
(N) = Denotes Sections Newly Issued as Dated.
(R) = Denotes Sections Revised and Reissued as Dated.
(D) = Denotes Sections Deleted as Dated.
(R) 14095
SHIM CARRIAGE EQUIPMENT -07/28/2016
14360
25/5 TON BRIDGE CRANE
14630
3 TON BRIDGE CRANE
14930
DROP TABLE SYSTEM
DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL
15030
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
15031
ESCUTCHEONS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
15032
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING
15033
VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
15034
IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
15035
FACILITY FIRE-SUPPRESSION WATER-SERVICE PIPING
(R) 15037
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS -07/28/2016
(R) 15038
FIRE-SUPPRESSION STANDPIPES -07/28/2016
15039
PREPACKAGED ELECTRIC-DRIVE, CENTRIFUGAL FIRE PUMP WITH PREFABRICATED BUILDING
ENCLOSURE
15057
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
15061
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
15073
VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
15076
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
(R) 15082
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION -07/28/2016
15111
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
15123
EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
15126
METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
15128
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
15129
ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
15130
FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING
15140
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
15145
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
15150
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
15155
SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES
15156
SANITARY WASTE INTERCEPTORS
TOC - 6
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
(N) = Denotes Sections Newly Issued as Dated.
(R) = Denotes Sections Revised and Reissued as Dated.
(D) = Denotes Sections Deleted as Dated.
15160
FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING
15161
STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES
15195
FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING
15211
GENERAL-SERVICE COMPRESSED-AIR PIPING
15412
EMERGENCY PLUMBING FIXTURES
15421
COMMERCIAL WATER CLOSETS
15422
COMMERCIAL URINALS
15423
COMMERCIAL LAVATORIES
15445
SANITARY SEWERAGE PUMPS
15500
SPEC REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC WORK
15502
HVAC IDENTIFICATION
15504
VIBRATION ISOLATION AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS FOR HVAC
15510
REFRIGERANT AND CONDENSATE PIPING
15511
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
15620
AIR INLETS AND OUTLETS
15700
ELECTRIC UNIT HEATERS AND CABINET HEATERS
15780
GAS FIRED UNIT HEATERS
15855
GAS FIRED MAKEUP AIR UNITS
15856
GAS FIRED HEAT-RECOVERY HEATING AND VENTILATING UNITS
15857
SPLIT-SYSTEM HEAT-PUMP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS
15858
ROOFTOP HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING UNITS
15860
FANS
15861
DOOR AIR CURTAIN UNITS
15880
DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES
(R) 15885
DUCTWORK INSULATION -07/28/2016
15890
BREECHINGS AND CHIMNEYS
15970
DDC AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS
15993
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
DIVISION 16 – ELECTRICAL
16010
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16050
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
TOC - 7
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
(N) = Denotes Sections Newly Issued as Dated.
(R) = Denotes Sections Revised and Reissued as Dated.
(D) = Denotes Sections Deleted as Dated.
16060
GROUNDING AND BONDING
16073
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
16075
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
16120
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
16124
MEDIUM-VOLTAGE CABLES
16130
RACEWAYS AND BOXES
16138
UNDERGROUND DUCTBANKS AND MANHOLES
16140
WIRING DEVICES
16150
WIRING CONNECTIONS
16231
PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR
16271
MEDIUM-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER
(R) 16341
MEDIUM-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR -07/28/2016
16410
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
16415
TRANSFER SWITCHES
16420
ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS
16441
SWITCHBOARDS
16442
PANELBOARDS
16461
DRY-TYPE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
16511
INTERIOR LIGHTING
(R) 16600
OVERHEAD CONTACT SYSTEM -07/28/2016
16615
CATENARY FITTINGS AND HARDWARE
16620
CATENARY SUPPORT AND REGISTRATION ASSEMBLIES
16625
INSULATORS
16630
SECTION INSULATORS
16635
DISCONNECT SWITCHES
16640
GROUNDING AND BONDING (12KV AC)
16645
POLE IDENTIFICATION AND WARNING SIGNS
16650
OVERHEAD CONTACT SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE
16717
COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING
16722
FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM ADDRESSABLE SYSTEM
16740
TELEPHONE SYSTEM
16770
PAGING SYSTEM
TOC - 8
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
SEALS PAGE
1.1
DESIGN PROFESSIONALS OF RECORD
A.
Civil:
1.
Barbara T. Hoehne.
2.
044886-E.
3.
Responsible for Sections 02050, 02100, 02170, 02510, 02715, 02821,
02840, 02930, 02936, 02970.
B.
Civil:
1.
Douglas J. Glorie.
2.
PE084582.
3.
Responsible for Sections 02085, 02090, 02091.
SEALS PAGE - 1
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
C.
Trackwork:
1.
Robert C. Phillips.
2.
PE056524E
3.
Responsible for Sections 02450, 02455, 02457, 02458, 02459, 02466,
02468, 02470, 02475.
D.
Utilities:
1.
Robert H. Vincent.
2.
PE084654.
3.
Responsible for Sections 02130, 02553, 02665, 02730.
SEALS PAGE - 2
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
E.
Architectural:
1.
Suzanne Sowinski.
2.
RA-015575-B.
3.
Responsible for Sections 02070, 03451, 03600, 04200, 05400, 05500,
05511, 05520, 05530, 05550, 06100, 06820, 07140, 07210, 07214, 07413,
07426, 07510, 07620, 07710, 07720, 07840, 07841, 07900, 07950, 08100,
08310, 08331, 08410, 08450, 08710, 08800, 09260, 09300, 09510, 09651,
09653, 09900, 09902, 09960, 10200, 10211, 10240, 10290, 10400, 10505,
10522, 10800, 13120.
F.
Geotechnical:
1.
John F. Pizzi.
2.
PE043651R.
3.
Responsible for Sections 02140, 02160, 02176, 02200, 02345.
SEALS PAGE - 3
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
G.
Structural:
1.
James J Cardillo.
2.
PE04365TR.
3.
Responsible for Sections 02367, 03300, 05120, 05310, 05530.
H.
Mechanical HVAC:
1.
Paul Lopez.
2.
PE052003E.
3.
Responsible for Sections 15500, 15502, 15504, 15510, 15511, 15620,
15700, 15780, 15855, 15856, 15857, 15858, 15860, 15861, 15880, 15885,
15800, 15970, 15993.
SEALS PAGE - 4
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
I.
Mechanical Plumbing and Fire-Protection:
1.
James Perise.
2.
PE084752.
3.
Responsible for Sections 15030, 15031, 15032, 15033, 15034, 15035,
15037, 15038, 15039, 15057, 15061, 15073, 15076, 15082, 15111, 15123,
15126, 15128, 15129, 15130, 15140, 15145, 15150, 15155, 15156, 15160,
15161, 15195, 15211, 15412, 15421, 15422, 15423, 15445.
J.
Industrial Equipment:
1.
Kevin D. Bomboy.
2.
PE038459-E.
3.
Responsible for Sections 11000, 11100, 11050, 11130, 11150, 11135,
11190, 11680, 14050, 14095, 14360, 14630, 14930.
SEALS PAGE - 5
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
K.
Electrical Engineer:
1.
Freddy E. Tamayo.
2.
PE062513.
3.
Responsible for Sections 16010, 16050, 16060, 16073, 16075,16120,
16124, 16130, 16138, 16140, 16150,16231, 16271, 16341, 16410, 16415,
16420, 16441, 16442, 16461, 16511, 16722.
L.
OCS and Communications:
1.
Yayu Choy.
2.
PE078379.
3.
Responsible for Sections 02367, 16600, 16615, 16620, 16625, 16630,
16635, 16640, 16645, 16650 16717, 16740, 16770.
END OF DOCUMENT
SEALS PAGE - 6
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
SECTION 01400 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A.
The Contractor shall establish and maintain a project specific Quality
Assurance/Quality Control (QA/QC) system documented by a program
manual and supporting plans and/or procedures. These documents will
address the methods to be used to control the quality related aspects of all
materials, components and assemblies to be furnished and installed under
the Contract Documents.
B.
The Contractor shall have the primary responsibility for the quality of all its
work and shall ensure that the pertinent requirements for the achievement
of quality are included and implemented in all relevant sub-contracts.
C.
The QA/QC program shall include a description of the organization the
contractor will establish and shall identify the responsibilities and
accountabilities of all personnel performing quality-affecting activities.
D.
The QA/QC program and/or procedures shall include those checklists and
test & inspection forms the contractor will use to properly document the
activities performed to achieve the quality of the Work. The contractor will
be responsible for completing the checklists and activities called for in
SEPTA’s Construction Inspection/ Monitoring Program as part of their
Quality Control program.
E.
The Contractor will cooperate fully with SEPTA’s QA/QC efforts including,
but not limited to, providing requested information in a timely fashion when
SEPTA executes quality audits of the project. All information generated
during the project, of a non-confidential nature, including but not limited to
the internal QA/QC audits executed by the contractor must be made
available to SEPTA in a timely manner.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A.
The Following definitions pertain to requirements of this section.
1.
v.15-04
Quality Assurance (QA): QA is a program of planned and systematic
actions that provide adequate confidence that all activities affecting
quality have been accomplished in accordance with governing
codes, standards and contract requirements. QA oversight of
activities affecting quality is accomplished through field and
Quality Requirements
01400 - 1
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
manufacturing facility surveillance, audits or other documented
measures conducted to verify that requirements have been met.
1.03
2.
Quality Control (QC): Quality Control is the act of examining,
witnessing, inspecting, checking and/or testing of in-process or
completed work to determine conformity with specified requirements
and documenting the results.
3.
QA Audit: A documented activity performed by written procedure or
checklist to verify that selected elements of the Quality
Assurance/Quality Control Program have been developed,
documented, and implemented in accordance with specified
requirements.
4.
Calibration: Comparison of two instruments or measuring devices,
one of which is of known accuracy traceable to national standards,
to detect, correlate, report or eliminate by adjustment any
discrepancy in the accuracy of the instrument or measuring device
being compared with the standard.
5.
Certification: The action of determining, verifying and attesting, in
writing, to the qualifications of personnel, materials, and/or
equipment.
6.
Inspection: A phase of Quality Control, which by means of
examination, observation, or measurement, determines the
conformance of materials, components , parts, appurtenances,
systems, processes, installations, or structures to predetermined
quality requirements.
7.
Source Inspection: Source inspection consists of the review,
monitoring, observation, and/or inspection, random or consistent, or
at selected stages of manufacture or construction, of manufacturer
or sub-manufacturer's personnel, material, equipment, processes, or
tests.
8.
Site Inspection: Site Inspection consists of reviewing, monitoring,
observing and inspecting the Work at the project site.
9.
Surveillance: Term used to describe a review performed for the
purpose of verifying that applicable quality requirements are properly
accomplished.
RELATED WORK:
A.
v.15-04
Requirements of the Agreement.
Quality Requirements
01400 - 2
July 28, 2016
1.04
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
B.
Section 01700: Contract Closeout.
C.
Specific requirements of Agreement Paragraph XVIII.
Revision No. 1
SUBMITTALS
A.
SEPTA reserves the right to require mock-ups of any material and/or
assembly, at any time during the construction process of a size determined
by SEPTA PM. Once approved, the mock-up will set a minimum standard of
performance and/or appearance for the work. Mock-ups will be provided at
no cost to SEPTA. The approved mock-up may, at the discretion of SEPTA
project manager, become part of the work.
B.
The contractor will create a job specific Quality Assurance and Control Plan
(QACP) which clearly and comprehensively specifies the actions the
contractor will take to achieve the quality required by the contract documents.
This plan will be submitted no later than 15 days from the notice to proceed.
No work may take until the QACP has been accepted by SEPTA. The
following areas will be addressed in this plan:
v.15-04
1.
The Quality Assurance procedures shall define the organizational
structure within which the programs are to be implemented, and delineate
the responsibility and authority of the various personnel involved
2.
Shop Fabrication: The Contractor shall develop and submit inspection and
test plans and procedures for all elements of the work that will be shop
fabricated and tested. The inspection plans/procedures shall include
source inspection and testing that will be performed, accept/reject criteria
and the witness/hold points to be implemented to control the quality of
work.
3.
Site Construction/Installation: The Contractor shall develop and explain
inspection and test plans and procedures for all elements of the Work that
will be site constructed and installed, including the storage and installation
of shop fabricated items. The installation plans and procedures shall
include checklists, which outline the sequence of construction/installation
activities and describe the verification checks for each step in the
sequence, which must be found acceptable prior to proceeding. The plans
and checklists shall be submitted to SEPTA for the identification of hold
and/or witness points by SEPTA.
4.
The Contractor shall develop and explain a Quality Assurance program
and surveillance methods to verify that reviewed inspection, testing and
documentation activities have been performed to assure that shop
fabricated and site construction/installation comply with the quality
standards defined in the contract documents.
Quality Requirements
01400 - 3
July 28, 2016
5.
1.05
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
SEPTA's review of the QA/QC program shall not relieve the Contractor
from its primary responsibility for the quality of the work.
QUALITY ASSURANCE RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE CONTRACTOR
A.
Engage an adequate number of skilled professionals who are thoroughly
trained, experienced and familiar with the specific requirements and
methods needed for the proper performance of the Work.
B.
Establish technical and administrative surveillance and/or audit methods to
ensure the highest degree of quality, and to correct potential problems
without affecting the Contract schedule.
C.
Verify that the required quality control inspection, testing and
documentation activities have been performed to assure that the
equipment, materials and construction comply in all respect to the
requirements of the contract documents.
D.
Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, fabricators, products,
services, site conditions, workmanship and installation to produce work of
the quality required by the contract documents.
E.
Take corrective actions in a timely manner to identify conditions adversely
affecting the quality of Work and the contract schedule.
F.
All test results shall clearly include a statement that the item tested or
analyzed conforms or fails to conform to the contract requirements. Each
report shall be conspicuously stamped on the cover sheet in large red letters
a minimum of ½ inch high "CONFORMS" or "DOES NOT CONFORM" to
the Specifications as the case may be.
G.
All test reports shall be signed by a testing laboratory's authorized person
and counter signed by the Contractor. The testing agency shall provide all
tests, reports, certifications and other documentation sent directly to SEPTA
PM at the same time results are made available to the Contractor.
H.
The quality assurance functions shall include, but not be limited to.
v.15-04
· Contract Review
· Document Control
· Factory and Field Testing
· Handling and Storage
· Procurement
· Packaging and Shipping
· Shop Fabrication
· Field Fabrication
· Quality Records
· Non Conformance Reporting
Quality Requirements
01400 - 4
July 28, 2016
1.06
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
· Field Installation
· Field Assembly
· Corrective Action (s)
· QA Audits
· Receiving Inspections
· Training
· Final Inspection
· In process inspections
· Control of In Process Activities
· Identification and Traceability
I.
The Contractor shall promptly reject work, which does not comply with the
requirements of the contract documents. If the contractor elects to propose
that SEPTA accept work that is nonconforming, the contractor shall
reimburse SEPTA for the costs associated with the review of the
nonconforming work by the designer of record.
J.
Develop quality assurance forms in a format acceptable to SEPTA for all
major elements of the Work including any additional elements
K.
The Contractor shall perform audits periodically, no less than four times a
year, to maintain level of quality. The results of these audits must be
documented and shown to SEPTA on request.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL RESPONSIBILITIES OF CONTRACTOR
A.
Document that each material, manufactured product and fabricated item is
produced and tested to comply with quality standards required by the
contract documents. The Contractor shall perform audits periodically, no
less than four times a year, to maintain level of quality.
B.
Do not deliver material, manufactured product or fabricated item until
certified quality assurance documents are satisfactorily reviewed by
SEPTA.
C.
Do not schedule any factory tests/inspections by SEPTA until these
documents are satisfactorily reviewed by SEPTA. Twenty-one (21) day’s
prior written notice is mandatory for (re) scheduling any factory tests or
inspections by SEPTA.
D.
SEPTA reserves the right to source inspect the material, manufactured
product or fabricated item after acceptance of the certified quality assurance
documents. Any and all costs related to reinspection(s) by SEPTA shall be
the responsibility of the Contractor.
E.
The quality assurance documents shall identify any changes made to the
material, manufactured product or fabricated item as compared to the
Contract requirements and approved shop drawings. The Contractor shall
v.15-04
Quality Requirements
01400 - 5
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
describe as to how each change will affect the installation, space and
subsequent operations.
F.
1.07
SEPTA's review of quality assurance documents and inspections shall not
relieve the Contractor from its "primary" responsibility for the quality of work.
CONTRACTOR QUALITY MANAGER (QM)
A.
1.08
The Contractor shall identify an individual (QM) within its organization at the
site of the Work, who shall be responsible for overall management of
Contractor's Quality Assurance/ Quality Control (CQC) system. An
individual who has no other duties shall fill the function of the QM.
1.
The QM shall be experienced in the performance and supervision of the
inspections and tests required by the specifications.
2.
The QM shall be on the work site at all times that work is taking place and
have complete authority to take any action necessary to ensure
conformance with the Contract.
3.
The QM will be the point-of-contact for all quality matters. The QM is
expected to represent the Contractor with respect to all QA audit and
review activities performed on the Contractor by outside parties.
4.
The QM shall be appointed by letter and may not be replaced without
written permission form SEPTA.
5.
The QM may take daily direction from the Contractors Superintendent
however unless prohibited by organizational size the QM shall
independently report to an official within the Contractor's organization who
is separate from direct responsibility for the outcome of the project.
6.
The QM shall be responsible for the documented incoming inspection and
determination of acceptability in conformance with Contract requirements
of all material arriving at site.
7.
Receiving inspection(s) shall include the review of associated
documentation where necessary to verify the compliance of the item.
Segregate and remove from the site, any nonconforming material.
SITE QUALITY CONTROL RESPONSIBILITIES OF CONTRACTOR
A.
Unless otherwise specially allowed elsewhere in the contract, do not deliver
reconditioned material to site. Protect all stenciled markings, labels and any
other type of identification(s) to clearly identify the originality of the material.
B.
As soon as the material arrives at site, (but before beginning installation)
v.15-04
Quality Requirements
01400 - 6
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
provide to SEPTA the original Bill of Lading and Certification that the
material complies with the requirements of the contract documents.
1.09
1.10
C.
Installation shall comply with approved shop drawings. Do not begin
installation until relevant installation shop drawings have been appropriately
reviewed by SEPTA. If for any reason the material or component cannot
be installed according to the approved shop drawing and the installation
instructions provided by the manufacturer/fabricator the contractor is to alert
SEPTA immediately and not begin installation without concurrence from
SEPTA PM.
D.
Perform necessary and specified tests and document the results. Replace
material that fails the tests at no cost to SEPTA.
E.
Remove and replace material that is damaged in storage or in the
performance of Work unless specifically accepted in writing by SEPTA's
Project Manager.
F.
No Work shall be performed at the site if the Contractor's Superintendent or
his authorized representative, as approved by SEPTA, is not present at the
location where Work is being performed.
NON-CONFORMANCE REPORTS
A.
A non-conformance report (NCR) shall be issued when any material or
component does not meet the requirements of the contract documents in
the opinion of SEPTA Project Manager or other approved SEPTA
personnel.
B.
Once issued, the contractor has ten (10) days to challenge the NCR in a
written response to SEPTA PM.
C.
Any NCR not withdrawn in writing by SEPTA PM or other approved SEPTA
personnel, must be corrected in a timely manner.
D.
The contractor is obliged not to proceed with any work which would cover
or reduce access to the non-conforming work.
CONSTRUCTION INSPECTION AND MONITORING PROGRAM
A.
v.15-04
The contractor will be required to complete checklists, usually in the
presence of a member of SEPTA project team, at specific critical points of
the project’s execution to verify quality assurance procedures. SEPTA
reserves the right to provide these checklists and require their completion
in a timely manner without prior notification.
Quality Requirements
01400 - 7
July 28, 2016
1.11
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
SUGGESTED CONTENTS OF A QA/QC PLAN
The contractor’s inspection and testing plan must be specific and not
generic; tailored to the actual requirements of the project. Most plans will
include many of the following items:
A.
B.
C.
Organization & Responsibilities
1.
Provide an organizational chart showing who has responsibility for
quality control functions and how they interact with the rest of the
project team. The QA/QC team must report directly to upper
management and not to the project manager overseeing day to day
activities of the project.
2.
Supply brief resumes of key personnel
3.
Document how the QA/QC personnel will oversee the QA/QC
activities subcontractors and fabricators.
Procedures and Documentation
1.
Samples of logs and checklists to be used in QA/QC activities.
2.
A schedule of tests, inspections and mock-ups required by the
contract documents and governmental authorities
3.
Procedures which guarantee that any material which must meet a
specific test or other definition of quality is delivered to the job site
accompanied by written verification that the material does meet
these requirements. Included in this procedure is the process of
gathering this information and retaining it by the contractor.
4.
Procedures which insure that handling and storage instructions are
obtained and followed for all material.
5.
Procedures that insure that the contractor effectively controls
documents at the job site. Included in this responsibility is a
requirement that a copy of the most current construction documents
is present at the job site at all times; including but not limited to
drawings, specifications, addendum items, change orders and RFI’s.
6.
Procedures which insure that subcontractors and material suppliers
have demonstrated qualifications as required by the contract
documents.
Inspection and Testing Activities
1.
v.15-04
List of inspection devices to be used by the contractor or a
subcontractor which must be calibrated, the proposed frequency of
Quality Requirements
01400 - 8
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
calibration and who will calibrate them.
D.
2.
Procedures to ensure that testing and inspections will be done in a
timely manner and will not negatively impact the progress of the
work.
3.
Procedures to insure that mock-ups and preinstallation conferences
are done in a timely manner and give SEPTA PM sufficient time to
participate and review them without negatively impacting the
schedule.
4.
Procedures that insure that material which fail tests or inspections is
identified and segregated.
Audit Activities
1.
Define how and how often the QA/QC efforts for key construction
activities will be audited and how the results of this audit will be
presented to the job superintendent.
2.
Define when anticipated audits may be implemented.
END OF SECTION
v.15-04
Quality Requirements
01400 - 9
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
SECTION 01500 - CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A.
The General Contractor shall provide temporary facilities and controls
needed for the performance of its Work, provide for public and employee
safety and protect SEPTA property. This may include, but not necessarily
limited to:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
1.02
1.03
1.04
Temporary utilities such as heat, water, electricity, and telephone;
Field office for the Contractor's personnel and a separate facility for
SEPTA’s personnel use
Sanitary facilities
Enclosures such as tarpaulins, barricades and canopies;
First-aid facilities
Temporary fencing and other safety devices for pedestrian and
vehicular traffic as well as isolating the construction area.
Entry Control
Personnel Identification
RELATED WORK
A.
Agreement
B.
Section 01010:
Summary of Work
C.
Section 01060:
Regulatory Requirements and Safety
D.
Section 01590:
SEPTA Field Office
SUBMITTALS
A.
The Contractor shall comply with pertinent provisions of section 01300.
B.
If required by SEPTA PM, the Contractor shall provide shop drawings
(including sealed engineering drawings if requested) for any temporary
facility.
PRODUCT HANDLING
The Contractor shall maintain and protect all temporary facilities and controls in
v.15-04
Construction Facilities And Temporary Controls
01500-1
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
proper and safe condition throughout progress of the Work. For facilities visible to
the public, the contractor will maintain them in an acceptable appearance and
repair any vandalism within 24 hours or as requested by SEPTA PM.
1.05
TEMPORARY UTILITIES AND SERVICES
A.
B.
Water
1.
The Contractor shall provide drinking water from an approved source, so
piped or transported as to keep it safe and fresh and served from single
service containers or satisfactory types of drinking stands or fountains.
All such facilities and services shall be furnished in strict accordance
with existing governing health regulations.
2.
Refer to the Agreement, Paragraph VIII.D. The Contractor shall protect
pipes from freezing during inclement weather and repair any vandalism.
Sanitary facilities:
1.
Refer to the Agreement Paragraph VIII.D.
2.
The contractor is prohibited from using existing toilet facilities – either
those intended for SEPTA personnel or those intended for the public at
large.
3.
The Contractor shall furnish for the work force on this project, the
necessary toilets, secluded from public observation. The toilets shall be
kept in a clean, sanitary condition and shall comply with the requirements
and regulations of the agencies having jurisdiction. SEPTA PM must
approve all toilet locations and may demand increased maintenance if he
finds the level of maintenance unacceptable.
C.
v.15-04
Power and Lighting:
1.
The Contractor shall provide, maintain and pay for all costs of temporary
electrical and lighting services required at the site for the proper
performance and inspection of work. The level of lighting shall not be
less than the existing. Lighting shall also be provided to all temporary
public facilities at levels satisfactory to SEPTA PM. Remove services and
lighting after completion of work and repair of all damages.
2.
The Contractor shall provide area distribution boxes so located that the
individual trades may furnish and use 100 ft. maximum length extension
cords to obtain power and lighting at points where needed for work,
inspection, and safety.
Construction Facilities And Temporary Controls
01500-2
July 28, 2016
1.06
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
3.
The Contractor shall provide all necessary items such as breakers,
transformers, panel boards, and cable required for the service. The
Contractor shall provide a complete distribution system expanded as
required during the construction including wiring devices, outlets,
distribution panels, transformers, cable and other related work necessary
to provide a temporary power system for use during construction.
4.
The Contractor shall pay all costs associated with the utility tie-ins,
physical plant, maintenance of system throughout construction, removal
of same at project completion and any other items necessary in providing
temporary power and light.
5.
The temporary power and lighting system shall at all times conform to the
applicable codes and regulations of OSHA, NEMA, UL, and the local
municipality.
D.
Telephones: The Contractor shall make necessary arrangements and
pay costs for installation, maintenance and operation of direct line (nonpay type) telephone services in SEPTA's field office at the site. Portable
(cellular) may be provided to fulfill this requirement at SEPTA PM
discretion.
E.
Heating: The Contractor shall provide and maintain heat necessary for
proper conduct of operations.
ACCESS, STORAGE AND PARKING AREAS
A.
The Contractor shall establish a construction compound in which the
Contractor provided SEPTA office trailers will be located adjacent to the
Contractors office trailers. The physical location of the compound will
require written approval of SEPTA's Project Manager.
B.
The Contractor shall provide a minimum of six (6) parking spaces
adjacent to SEPTA trailers within the compound for SEPTA vehicles.
C.
The Contractor shall provide all necessary security for this compound
area. The Contractor shall provide all necessary keys to SEPTA's
Project Manager to provide access to the compound at any time.
D.
The Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager a plan layout of the
Compound within 21 calendar days after Notice to Proceed (NTP).
E.
The Contractor shall coordinate the provision of utility services for all
trailers and be responsible for all installation charges, removal costs at
v.15-04
Construction Facilities And Temporary Controls
01500-3
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
Project completion, and any periodic or other charges incidental to the
provision of those utility services.
F.
1.07
Upon final acceptance of the Work, the Contractor shall clean up the work
areas and leave them in a neat and orderly condition. The Contractor
shall dismantle and remove all temporary fencing and barricades and
other temporary items installed, unless otherwise directed by the Project
Manager. Repair damaged areas to their original condition.
FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS
A.
B.
Contractor's Field Office:
1.
1.
The General Contractor shall fFurnish and maintain a
field office with a telephone at the site during the entire period of
construction. The Contractor’s superintendent shall be present at
said office at all times while its work is in progress. Keep readily
accessible, at the field office, copies of both the Contract
Documents and the latest approved shop and working drawings.
2.
The General Contractor shall be responsible for furnishing the
trailers and ongoing operation of the facilities throughout the
duration of construction. Trailers shall be sized to accommodate
(4) toilet compartments, including (1) accessible stall) and (3)
accessible sinks. Trailers shall be removed from the site by the
GC upon completion of the project.
32.
Submit for SEPTA's written acceptance, working drawings showing
proposed locations and size of offices and shops.
Field Office Security
The Contractor shall Guard against unauthorized or illegal entry and
protect the field office against vandalism, theft and mischief. The
Contractor shall be responsible for the replacement and/or
compensation for any items owned by SEPTA or SEPTA employees,
which are related to the subject work, which are removed or damaged
as the result of vandalism, theft, mischief or illegal entry to the field
office.
C.
v.15-04
Upon project completion, the Contractor shall assume ownership of and
remove temporary field offices and appurtenances from the job site,
except as otherwise noted.
Construction Facilities And Temporary Controls
01500-4
July 28, 2016
1.08
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
TEMPORARY BARRICADES, ENCLOSURES AND FENCING
A.
B.
The Contractor shall provide all temporary barricades required by the
phasing plans or otherwise necessary for the safe execution of the
project, including but not limited to barricades for designated contractor
work areas, contractor laydown areas, and public access for areas that
must remain open during a phase.
1.
Where barricades are required outside a designated work area for
the exclusive use of a Contractor, that Contractor shall provide them.
2.
SEPTA reserves the right to require the contractor to provide all
necessary barricades to insure the safety of SEPTA personnel and
passengers as determined by SEPTA PM, whose decision shall be
final
Submit drawings of the proposed temporary barricades for SEPTA’s
review. Do not install barricades until the drawings for them have been
reviewed by SEPTA. All barriers in confined spaces, as determined by
SEPTA PM, must be constructed to not contribute smoke to or support
flame spread of a fire. To achieve this, such barriers shall be built of metal
studs and Wonderboard style cement board.
1.
Barricades shall enclose and prevent entry into the work area and
shall be full height and dustproof.
2.
Barricades shall be constructed of materials suitable for location.
At open locations in unconfined spaces - Wood construction shall
conform to the AFPA “National Design Specification for Wood
Construction”, the latest edition. As a minimum, the barricades shall
be constructed of 5/8 “thick APA rated exterior grade plywood.
Framing members shall be Spruce-Pine-Fir No.2 or better, a
minimum of 2” x 4” and larger sizes as necessary, spaced at a
maximum 16” on center to provide a rigid temporary structure to
resist all applicable loads.
All barriers in confined spaces, as determined by SEPTA PM, must
be constructed to not contribute smoke to or support flame spread of
a fire. To achieve this, such barriers shall be built of metal studs and
Wonderboard style cement board.
v.15-04
3.
Barricades shall be painted on all solid surfaces exposed to public
view.
4.
Traffic cones, tape, stakes with ribbons or other insubstantial items
shall not be used to differentiate construction areas in lieu of
Construction Facilities And Temporary Controls
01500-5
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
barricades. At his sole discretion, SEPTA project manager may make
exceptions for work of extremely short duration.
1.09
1.10
C.
Temporary Doors: The temporary barricades shall have a reasonable
number of hollow metal doors and frames, with locksets, at locations
acceptable to SEPTA. The locksets on the doors requiring SEPTA
access for operational and safety reasons shall be keyed to SEPTA’s
standard lock system.
D.
On a daily basis, the Contractor shall maintain the temporary barricades
in a “like new” condition. The Contractor shall remove graffiti and restore
surfaces on a continual maintenance basis. Maintenance shall continue
until the barricades are removed.
E.
The Contractor is required to enclose areas required by SEPTA for
access and maintenance. If these areas are in public areas they shall be
secured with temporary barricades and doors in accordance to 1.08 C&D
above. The Contractor shall take all means to alleviate any or all tripping
and falling hazards both within the work site but also in public areas.
Areas where the general public or passengers may fall shall be secure
and covered.
TEMPORARY SIGNAGE (CONSTRUCTION)
A.
The contractor must provide an adequate number of signs to direct the
public around the construction site, as determined by SEPTA PM. These
signs must be professionally fabricated and maintained/replaced to keep
an “as new” appearance.
B.
The contractor must install project identification signs as defined in
These signs must be professionally fabricated and maintained/replaced
to keep an “as new” appearance.
PROTECTION OF NEW WORK AND AREAS OUTSIDE OF THE PROJECT
A.
The contractor shall take all necessary precautions to protect new work
(whether executed by him or others). All damage which does occur shall
be repaired to the satisfaction of SEPTA PM at no cost to SEPTA.
B.
The contractor must avoid damaging all property and facilities not
included in the project scope. All damage which does occur shall be
repaired to the satisfaction of SEPTA PM at no cost to SEPTA. If nonSEPTA property is damaged it must be repaired to the written satisfaction
of the owner and at no cost to SEPTA.
v.15-04
Construction Facilities And Temporary Controls
01500-6
July 28, 2016
1.11
Revision No. 1
DUST CONTROL
A.
1.12
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
The contractor shall take all necessary precautions to eliminate dust and
dirt created during the construction process from entering non-project
areas and those areas not owned by SEPTA. The contractor shall be
responsible for cleaning affected areas and restoring then to their
preconstruction condition to the satisfaction of the property owner and at
no cost to SEPTA.
SECURITY
A.
The Contractor shall provide adequate security measures to protect
material, equipment, and work from incidental and intentional damage or
theft at project site locations, staging areas and fabrication yards.
B.
The use of guard dogs and the possession of firearms on SEPTA
property are prohibited.
C.
The contractor shall be responsible for supplying the following security
measures:
D.
1.
Exterior lighting of 20 – 30 lux within the yard areas.
2.
8’ high chain link fence enclosure with gate(s) so the yard areas may
be fully secured during non-work periods. Chain link fence fabric to
have openings no greater than 2 1/2”.
The Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager a plan layout of the
security measures within 21 calendar days after Notice to Proceed (NTP).
This information may be included in the compound plan required by 1.06
D above.
END OF SECTION
v.15-04
Construction Facilities And Temporary Controls
01500-7
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
SECTION 01570 - MAINTENANCE AND PROTECTION OF VEHICLES,
PEDESTRIANS AND PASSENGERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A.
The Work specified in this Section consists of furnishing, installing,
maintaining, and subsequently removing temporary traffic control devices,
and temporary traffic striping and markings; furnishing flagmen and police
protection, as required by the local Jurisdiction. If the work does require
flagging and affects a state highway, the flagman must receive state training
and approval.
The Work also includes controlling, warning, guiding, and protecting vehicles
and pedestrian traffic on streets and sidewalks affected by construction of
the Project, and adjacent to worksite; maintenance and control of SEPTA
passengers on, or adjacent to, the worksite, ensuring unimpeded access to
buildings and/or SEPTA Facilities adjacent to the worksite; and the closing
of streets and sidewalks; all as specified and directed by the Contract
Documents including Maintenance of Traffic and Construction Phasing
Contract Drawings.
B.
The Contractor shall prepare any Drawings detail the approved vehicle traffic
and pedestrian control plan required for the Work. The Contractor shall
prepare working drawings showing proposed traffic control devices and shall
apply to the local jurisdictional agency for any permits necessary to work in
the public right-of-way.
Any proposed changes to the Contractor’s indicated vehicle traffic control
plan shall be shown on working drawings prepared by the Contractor and
shall be submitted to the local jurisdictional agency for approval. A copy of
the revised and approved drawings shall be transmitted to the Project
Manager.
C.
The Contractor shall prepare any Drawings detail SEPTA approved
passenger control plan required for the Work. The Contractor(s) passenger
control plan can be submitted with the work plan (Section 01010) and Site
Specific Work Plan, if applicable.
Any proposed changes to the Contractor’s passenger control plan shall be
shown on working drawings prepared by the Contractor and shall be
submitted to the Project Manager for SEPTA’s review.
v.15-04
Maintenance And Protection Of Vehicles,
Pedestrians And Passengers
01570-1
July 28, 2016
1.02
1.03
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
RELATED WORK
A.
Section 01010:
Summary of Work
B.
Section 01060:
Regulatory Requirements and Safety
C.
Section 01300:
Submittals
D.
Section 01500:
Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
v.15-04
The Contractor shall submit a Traffic Control Plan (TCP) to PennDOT
and local Jurisdiction for approval (copy to Project Manager) before
starting Work; submit an updated TCP every time it becomes necessary
to modify traffic operation or undertake construction in accordance with
the requirements of PennDOT Publication No. 203, "Work Zone Traffic
Control". The TCP shall show and describe proposed locations and time
durations of the following:
1.
Pedestrian and public vehicular traffic routing.
2.
Traffic blockage and lane reductions anticipated to be caused by
construction operations.
3.
Allowable on-street parking within immediate vicinity of worksite.
4.
Access to buildings immediately adjacent to worksite.
5.
Driveways which will, and those which will not, be blocked by
construction operations.
6.
Temporary traffic control devices required on streets and sidewalks
affected by construction.
7.
Temporary commercial and industrial loading and unloading zones.
8.
Police Traffic Protection.
The Contractor shall submit a Passenger or Pedestrian Control Plan in
accordance with the construction Phasing Drawings. All Passenger
control signage shall be submitted to SEPTA for review prior to
Fabrication.
Maintenance And Protection Of Vehicles,
Pedestrians And Passengers
01570-2
July 28, 2016
1.04
Revision No. 1
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
1.05
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Referenced Standards:
1.
Commonwealth of Pennsylvania, Department of Transportation,
PennDOT Standard Specifications, Publication 408, latest edition.
2.
Commonwealth of Pennsylvania, Department of Transportation,
Publication No. 203, Work Zone Traffic Control, latest edition
A color proof of all graphics must be reviewed by SEPTA prior to
fabrication and use.
JOB CONDITIONS
A.
At various times during the construction period, as defined in 1.03A8 above
and/or as required by the day to day work; the Contractor may need to
provide uniformed police officers to maintain traffic control at the
construction site. The Contractor shall include the costs for all police traffic
protection activities associated with the work in the price as bid for the Work.
No extra costs will be considered for police protection during the Work of
this Contract. The Contractor shall enter into an Agreement with the local
jurisdiction to be directly reimbursed for furnishing the required police
protection.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES
A.
The Contractor shall conform to the latest Regulations for Official Traffic
Control Devices, 67 PA Code, Chapter 211; 67 PA Code, Chapter 203;
and, if required, as follows:
1.
PennDOT Pub. 408, Section 627.2, Temporary Concrete Barrier.
2.
PennDOT Pub. 408, Section 962.2, Painting Traffic Lines and
Markings.
B.
Signs as required by the local jurisdiction.
C.
Warning lights and flares; Capable of alerting approaching traffic to
hazards, unsafe conditions, and variances to normal traffic patters.
D.
High-rise warning flag unit: Have three flags mounted nine feet above
v.15-04
Maintenance And Protection Of Vehicles,
Pedestrians And Passengers
01570-3
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
the base.
2.02
2.03
FLAGMEN SIGN
A.
Twenty-four (24) inches, octagonal, and attached to a five-foot handle.
One side of sign shall be a stop sign, and the other side of the sign shall
be a slow sign.
B.
Stop Sign shall have white reflectorized letters, not shorter than eight
inches, spelling STOP on a reflectorized, red, octagonal background.
C.
Slow Sign shall have black letters, not shorter than eight inches, spelling
SLOW on a reflectorized, orange, diamond background. The area
between diamond and edge of flagmen sign shall be black.
STATION CONTROL DEVICES
A.
All signs shall be of commercial quality and shall conform to SEPTA’s
graphic design standards. Submit all signs for review by SEPTA at least
ten (10) working days in advance of any work that will disrupt pedestrian
movement, disrupt transit operations, or necessitate closing of stairways,
entrances, etc. Do not perform the work until the signs are in place.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
CONTROLLING VEHICULAR, PEDESTRIAN ACCESS AND FLOW
ADJACENT TO WORKSITE /AND/OR STATION
A.
Fabricate and install passenger control signage and other devices
according to the approved passenger control plan.
B.
Maintain each sign throughout the project in a “like new” condition, free
of all unrelated signs, posters, painting, advertising and defacement of
any kind. Replace signs as necessary to maintain them in the “like new”
conditions.
C.
Remove all signs from the site and repair damages when the temporary
condition no longer is necessary or within 7 calendar days of notice from
SEPTA.
END OF SECTION
v.15-04
Maintenance And Protection Of Vehicles,
Pedestrians And Passengers
01570-4
June 13, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Final
SECTION 01580 - PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGNS AND OTHER
CONSTRUCTION SIGNAGE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
The work specified in this Section consists of furnishing and installing project identification
signs and temporary construction signs as described below and required by the Contract
Documentation.
1.02
1.03
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 01300
B.
Section 01500
C.
Section 01570
D.
Attachment: SEPTA Starburst Sign
SUBMITTALS
A.
In accordance with Section 01300, submit the following:
1.
Shop drawings of each sign scheduled to be utilized during
construction. Indicate materials, size, location, fonts and colors
proposed for use.
2.
After consultation with the Project Manager, submit the following sign
information for review and approval by SEPTA.
3.
v.15-04
a.
Sketch and narrative description identifying the location,
orientation and mounting height of each sign.
b.
Total quantity of each sign to be utilized
c.
Name, address, telephone number and key contact person of
the company responsible for the fabrication of the sign.
Hardware and mounting details for erection of each sign.
Project Identification Signs & Other Construction Signage
01580 - 1
June 13, 2016
1.04
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Final
JOB CONDITIONS
A.
B.
Signs shall be commercial quality and proofs shall be approved by SEPTA
prior to fabrication.
1.
Install Project Identification Signs within forty-five (45) calendar days
after the Notice to Proceed.
2.
Temporary Signage
3.
The No Trespassing Sign is to be installed within the Contractor’s
Project compound and other areas to be determined by the Project
Manager.
Non-project Signs:
Non project signs, such as business advertisements or labor union notices
may be permitted subject to review by SEPTA project Manager whose
decision will be final.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGN MATERIAL
A.
Sign Material
Cut sign base from a single 4’ x 8’ x ¾” thick, waterproof exterior. A-B grade
plywood with a smooth, finished surface. Round edges to a 1/8” radius.
Joints will not be permitted.
B.
Mounting Material:
1.
2.
v.15-04
General: Provide mounting frames and hardware of such quality to
be able to support the sign under all weather conditions for the
duration of the project.
a.
Unless surface mounted, support signs with frames
constructed with painted pressure treated dimension lumber,
or other approved non-conductive material, of sufficient size
to brace against weather conditions.
b.
Secure surface mounted signs using anchoring devices
approved by SEPTA.
Hardware:
Project Identification Signs & Other Construction Signage
01580 - 2
June 13, 2016
3.
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Final
a.
Galvanized screws or bolts with galvanized nuts and washers.
b.
Paint all hardware, visible in the finished assembly, to match
the adjointing surface of the sign or mounting.
Posts:
Pressure treated dimensional lumber or other non-conductive
material acceptable to SEPTA.
C.
Paint:
1.
Paint sign surfaces, posts and mounting frames with one coat of
primer sealer and two coats of white semi-gloss enamel on all sides
and edges.
2.
Use paint manufactured for exterior use by a manufacturer
acceptable to SEPTA.
D.
Acceptable Fabricator: A company specializing in and having documented
experience in the fabrication of graphic signs. Submit the fabricator’s
credentials tot eh SEPTA Project Manager for approval before any
fabrication.
E.
SEPTA Project Sign:
1.
Provide three (3) SEPTA Project Signs. Sample SEPTA Project Sign
is shown on Sketch # SEPTA-1, attached at the end of this Section.
Size: 4’ x 6’
v.15-04
2.
SEPTA will provide the Contractor with a proof copy of the
information to be displayed on SEPTA Project Sign at the PreConstruction Meeting.
3.
Obtain the services of a graphic sign company to transfer the
information contained on SEPTA provided computer disk onto 0.1
mm pressure sensitive vinyl with Weather-All Fluorinated
Polyurethane Coating, or approved equal film. The vinyl shall be
mounted onto the sign surface.
4.
Do not include information on SEPTA Project Signs except that
contained on the computer disk provided by SEPTA.
Project Identification Signs & Other Construction Signage
01580 - 3
June 13, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
5.
2.02
Final
The Contractor is responsible for advising the Project Manager of
any problems that occur during the production of SEPTA Project
Sign.
TEMPORARY SIGNS
A. Temporary signs are considered to be any sign not included in Article 2.01
above that is required to be erected during the construction phase of the project
and removed at the completion of the construction phase of the project. These
signs include, but are not limited to, Pedestrian Wayfinding signs, Field Office
Signs, and Safety and instructional signs for workers and visitors. This section
does not include signs utilized and required for the purpose of identifying public
street traffic closures and/or detours.
1. Pedestrian wayfinding signs
a. Each sign not to exceed 750 sq. in unless specifically required by
SEPTA Project Manager.
b. Signs shall be black Helvetica bold letters on white background
with key information in red.
c. If vandalized, signs must be replaced at no cost to SEPTA.
d. All signs must meet accessibility guidelines.
e. Total sign count not to exceed six (6) signs per phase.
f. If in satisfactory condition, signs may be reused phase to phase
with approval of SEPTA PM.
B.
v.15-04
Field Office Signs:
1.
Size: 4’ x 5’ wide.
2.
Letter with black enamel paint, using block letters at least 4” high,
with the Contract name.
Contract number, and the words
“CONTRACTOR’S FIELD OFFICE” or “SEPTA’S FIELD OFFICE” as
appropriate with each word painted on a separate line.
3.
Where the field offices to be identified are not readily visible from the
work site entrance, paint a directional arrow on the sign and locate
the sign near the entrance. In this case, provide additional signs of
reduced size with the words “CONTRACTOR’S FIELD OFFICE” or
“SEPTA’S FIELD OFFICE” as necessary to direct traffic to, and
identify the field office location(s).
Project Identification Signs & Other Construction Signage
01580 - 4
June 13, 2016
C.
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Final
No Trespassing Sign
1.
Sign base will be white baked enamel aluminum, 12” wide, 18” high
and .062” thick. Additional prints of two colors will be used; fire red
and black. 1” boarder on the top and both sides and ½ “ boarder on
the bottom.
2.
Sign Information
a.
1” down from the top is a 10” wide x 2.75” high fire red block
with reversed out white copy at 1.5” Helvetica. Med. Acct. A.
K. Rev. M that reads: WARNING centered in caps.
b.
5” down from the top is the baseline for 0.75” Helvetica. Med.
Acct. A. K. Rev. M, black copy to read: NO TRESPASSING
centered in caps.
c.
8.75” down from top is the center of a 6” fire red outlined circle
.5” thick with a diagonal 45 degree slash from the upper left to
the lower right of the circle. Behind the circle and slash is a
4.5” pictograph of a walking pedestrian.
d.
13” down from the top is the baseline for 0.75” Helvetica. Med.
Acct. A. K. Rev. M, in black copy to read: AUTHORIZED
centered in caps.
e.
14.125” down from the top is the baseline for 0.75 Helvetica.
Med. Acct. A. K. Rev. M, in black copy to read: PERSONNEL
ONLY centered in caps.
f.
16.5” down from the top is the baseline for 0.375” Helvetica.
Med. Acct. A. K. Rev. M, broken down in 4 lines of black copy
to read:
All Others Will Be Prosecuted In
Accordance With the Penalties Provided
In Section 3503 OF The Pennsylvania
Crimes Code.
Centered with initial caps.
g.
v.15-04
17.5” down from the top, flush right, is the base line for 0.5”
SEPTA logo in black.
Project Identification Signs & Other Construction Signage
01580 - 5
June 13, 2016
3.
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Final
Fasteners are not incorporated in the sign. Contractors can drill
holes in the signs to mount them on fencing, walls, and barricades
not to obstruct the message of the sign.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
3.02
INSPECTION
A.
Prior to erection, examine all signs to verify that the size, material and
wording is in accordance with the approved shop drawings.
B.
Examine areas and conditions under which the signs are to be located.
Prior to erection, notify the Project Manager of any conditions that may differ
from the information identified on the sign submission.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install signs in accordance with approved shop drawings and as directed by
the Project Manager. Support all non-surface mounted signs on a minimum
of two posts, anchored into the ground at a depth sufficient to provide rigid
support of the sign during all weather conditions.
B.
Provide Project Signs and SEPTA’s Field Office Signs at places designated
by SEPTA.
C.
No Trespassing signs shall be posted on every side at 40’ spacing on all
temporary fences and walls, barricades and compound fencing.
D.
Temporary Signs (if required):
E.
v.15-04
1.
Field Office Signs: Provide one sign for the Contractor’s field office
to indicate the Contractor’s location.
2.
Provide and install other temporary signs deemed necessary for the
project by SEPTA.
Sign Maintenance: Maintain all signs throughout the course of
construction from installation until contract completion, keeping them
clean, free from graffiti, in good repair and free of obstruction. Provide
and maintain adequate protection against weather so as to preserve all
work, materials, equipment, apparatus, and fixtures free from injury or
damage. Maintain all signs free of all unrelated signs, posters, painting,
advertising and defacement of any kind. Within five days of notice, the
Contractor shall clean, repair or replace signs as necessary to maintain
them in a “like-new” condition.
Project Identification Signs & Other Construction Signage
01580 - 6
June 13, 2016
F.
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Final
Within five days of final acceptance of the project by SEPTA, remove and
dispose of all project identification and temporary signs. If any signs have
disfigured a surface which is to become part of the final work, repair or
replace the surface to SEPTA Project Manager’s satisfaction. All costs for
the removal and disposal of signs shall be borne by the Contractor.
END OF SECTION
v.15-04
Project Identification Signs & Other Construction Signage
01580 - 7
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
SECTION 02466 - STEEL RAIL
PART 1
1.01
GENERAL
SUMMARY
A. The work of this Section includes technical requirements for steel running rail
and restraining rail to be used in the work shown on the Contract Documents.
B. Steel rails shall be 115 RE and 132 RE tee rail in accordance with Volume 1
Chapter 4 of the AREMA manual for Railway Engineering.
1.02
RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01300, “Submittals.”
B. Section 01400, “Quality Requirements”
C. Section 02450, “Trackwork”
D. Section 02459, “Rail Fasteners”
E. Section 02468, “Rail Welding”
F. Section 02475, “Special Trackwork”
1.03
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. AREMA, Latest edition, “Portfolio of Track-work Plans” and “Manual For
Railway Engineering”
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A. Contractor shall submit the following:
1. Certificates and Reports: Contractor shall submit the following:
a. Certificates of material compliance required by AREMA and this
Specification.
b. Test reports of chemical analyses, and other tests required by AREMA
and the Contract Documents.
STEEL RAIL
02466- 1
July 28, 2016
1.05
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Quality Assurance Program: Contractor shall refer to Section 01400 “Quality
Requirements” and conform to the requirement of the Quality Assurance
Program.
B. All rail shall be inspected in accordance with the current edition of the AREMA
Manual for Railway Engineering Vol. 1, Chapter 4, Part 2 for 115 RE rail and
132 RE rail.
PART 2
2.01
PRODUCTS
MATERIAL
A. All steel rails to be used in the continuous welded rail string shall be new and
in accordance with the current edition of the AREMA Manual for Railway
Engineering, Volume 1, Chapter 4, Part 2. “Specifications for Steel Rails”,
except as modified and supplemented as follows
1. Revise AREMA Manual, Chapter 4, Part 2, Article 9.3.2.3 to read as
follows: “9.3.2.3 – Central web streaking extending more than ½ inch in
the head or base (Figs. 9.5 and 9.6).”
2. Revise AREMA Manual, Chapter 4, Part 2, Article 9.3.2.4 to read as
follows: “9.3.2.4 – Streaking greater than 3 ½ inches in length.”
3. Revise AREMA Manual, Chapter 4, Part 2, Article 8.4.1 to read as follows:
“8.4.1 – The in-line testing system sensitivity level, using the calibration
rail, shall be adjusted to detect a minimum 3/32 inch diameter defect
anywhere in the sound path in the head, a 1/16 inch wide by ½ inch long
defect in the web and longitudinal imperfections exceeding ½ inch length
and greater than 1/16 inch depth occurring in the base.”
B. Records of rail purchased shall be kept in accordance with AREMA Manual,
Chapter 4, Part 3, “Report Forms”, and shall be furnished prior to delivery.
C. Relay rails are not acceptable.
D. All rails shall be AREMA grade standard strength control cooled, except for
special trackwork, and curves greater than 2 degrees of curvature, which
shall be premium, head hardened.
STEEL RAIL
02466- 2
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
E. Rail Section: 115 RE and 132 RE.
F. The standard length of rail shall not be less than 78’ prior to welding.
2.02
MANUFACTURE
A. All steel rails shall be new and manufactured in accordance with the current
edition of the AREMA Manual for Railway Engineering Vol. 1, Chapter 4, Part
2, supplemented as follows:
1. All rails shall be manually ultrasonic tested at rail ends in accordance with
the current edition of the AREMA Manual for Railway Engineering Vol. 1,
Chapter 4, Part 2 Article 2.1.17.2.
PART 3
3.01
EXECUTION
HANDLING AND INSTALLATION
A. Rail shall be handled carefully to avoid damage in accordance with Section
02450 Trackwork.
B. Rail shall be installed in accordance with Section 02450 Trackwork.
END OF SECTION
STEEL RAIL
02466- 3
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
SECTION 02468 - RAIL WELDING
PART 1
1.01
GENERAL
SUMMARY
A. The work of this Section includes, but is not limited to, providing all labor,
materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals necessary for on-site fabrication
and /or in track welding of continuously welded rail, CWR, to be used in the
work shown on the Contract Documents.
B. Welded strings shall generally be fabricated using Electric-Flash Butt Welding
process in accordance with AREMA Manual for Railway Engineering, Chapter
4, Section 3.10, General Specification for In-Track Welding Using Electric
Flash Butt (EFB) Welding Equipment, and as specified herein.
C. The Thermite Wwelding process shall be in accordance with AREMA Manual
for Railway Engineering, Chapte 4, Section 3.13, Specification for the Quality
Assurance of Thermite Welding of Rail, and as specified herein. Thermite
welding will be allowed at compromise welds and closure welds.is not
permitted.
D. All welding procedures shall also adhere to SEPTA SMW 100 Track
Department Welding Standards. In cases where these specifications conflict
with the SMW 100 the more restrictive shall apply.
1.02
RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01300, “Submittals.”
B. Section 01400, “Quality Requirements”
C. Section 02450, “Trackwork”
D. Section 02466, “Steel Rail”
1.03
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. AREMA, Latest edition, “Portfolio of Trackwork Plans” and “Manual For
Railway Engineering”
RAIL WELDING
02468- 1
July 28, 2016
1.04
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
SUBMITTALS
A. Contractor shall submit the following:
1. Proposed methods, and equipment and product information.
2. Record of Welds: Provide records of all welds giving pertinent details of
the welds such as current values, travel time, and any other data pertinent
to the welds. Group records for each rail string, and location. Furnish
plans indicating installed location of each string. Mark each rail string at
both ends of the string, with the string number. Submit records to the
SEPTA Project Manager.
3. Evidence that the person(s) in charge of performing the welds has current
certification from the weld manufacturer to install/perform the welds.
1.05
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Quality Assurance Program: Contractor shall refer to Section 01400 “Quality
Requirements” and conform to the requirement of the Quality Assurance
Program.
B. Testing:
1. Provide Ultrasonic testing of all welds in accordance with ASTM E164 and
E317, and American Society for Nondestructive Testing Recommended
Practice No SN7-TC-1A.
a. Welds shall exhibit one hundred percent (100%) fusion.
PART 2
2.01
PRODUCTS
MATERIAL
A. Steel rail
1. Section 02466, “Steel Rails”
B. For electric flash butt welding, materials, equipment and process shall be as
provided by Holland L.P. or approved equal.
C. For thermite welding, materials and equipment shall be one of the following
brands or approved equal:
RAIL WELDING
02468- 2
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
1. Orgo-Thermit, as distributed by Orgo-Thermit, Inc., Lakehurst, New
Jersey.
2. Boutet, as distributed by Esco, Elk Grove Village, Illinois.
3. Calorite, limited or standard preheat, as manufactured by Calorite Inc.,
Addison, Illinois and distributed by Portec Inc., Railway Products Division,
Oak Brook, Illinois.
1.
PART 3
3.01
EXECUTION
PREPARATION
A. Prepare rail ends as described in the AREMA Manual. Use angle grinders
with wire brush attachments to remove scale as necessary, and cover rail
ends to prevent further scale from building up on the surfaces before welding.
B. Weld all rail lengths with the brand facing the same side for the entire length
of each welded string.
C. Use abrasive saw for cropping rail. Torch cutting shall not be permitted.
Sawcuts shall be a minimum of 6 inches from existing rail welds.
D. A straightening press may be used in the welding production line to help
achieve or improve the alignment tolerances. Misalignment tolerances shall
conform to requirement of AREMA Manual. Rails with excessive droop or
local end condition or other alignment defects which cannot be straightened
to reasonably meet these requirements shall be cropped as required prior to
welding.
3.02
ELECTRIC FLASH-BUTT WELDING
A. Welded CWR strings shall be fabricated using Electric-Flash Butt (EFB)
Welding process in accordance with AREMA Manual for Railway Engineering,
Chapter 4, Section 3.10, General Specification for In-Track Welding Using
Electric Flash Butt (EFB) Welding Equipment, and as specified herein.
B. Finishing tolerances shall be in accordance with AREMA Specifications
except finish bottom of the rail base to plus or minus 0.010 inch of the highest
rail.
RAIL WELDING
02468- 3
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
C. All notches created by offset conditions or twisted rail shall be eliminated by
grinding to blend with adjacent surface.
C.D. Whenever the finishing process involves knot cutting or heavy grinding
which is done immediately following welding to prevent metallurgical damage,
complete the grinding at the normally high temperature when a production
line is interrupted. Remove all fins due to grinding drag.
3.03
THERMITE WELDING
A. Thermite welding process shall be in accordance with the weld kit
manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Finishing tolerances shall be in accordance with AREMA specifications
except finish bottom of the rail base to plus or minus 0.010 inch of the highest
rail.
3.033.04
INSPECTION
A. All welds giving indication of fault by ultrasonic inspection or failing to comply
with the misalignment tolerances, or rejected by the Project Manager for any
reason, shall be saw cut out a minimum of twelve (12”) inches on either side
of the rejected element, and the joint immediately rewelded, and reinspected
to approval, at no additional cost to SEPTA.
END OF SECTION
RAIL WELDING
02468- 4
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
SECTION 02475 - SPECIAL TRACKWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A.
1.02
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
1.03
1.05
The Work of this Section includes, but is not limited to furnishing and installing
railroad turnouts.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
1.04
The Work of this Section includes technical requirements for the design,
detailing, manufacturing, fabricating, furnishing and delivery of special trackwork
as described in the Contract Drawings.
Special trackwork shall be new and manufactured, fabricated, and inspected in
accordance with the following current standards:
1.
AREMA Manual for Railway Engineering and Portfolio of Trackwork Plans
2.
SEPTA Drawing 5-W-29874 - Standard Turnout Data
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Division 1 of these specifications.
B.
Section 02450, “Trackwork”
C.
Section 02457, “Timber Ties and Switch Ties ”
D.
Section 02458, “Ballast and Subballast ”
E.
Section 02459, “Rail Fasteners”
F.
Section 02466, “Steel Rail”
G.
Section 02468, “Rail Welding”
SUBMITTALS
A.
Contractor shall submit the following:
1.
Complete shop drawings detailing all components for each different
turnout and all associated turnout components, including but not limited to
the switch, frog, closure rails, stock rails, guardrails, switch stands, switch
plates and fasteners.
SPECIAL TRACKWORK
02475 - 1
1.2.
1.06
Complete product data and installation procedures for switch heaters.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Provide Field Engineering in accordance with Section 01050 of these
Specifications to reference proposed elevations, lines, and grades of tracks
under construction.
B.
Quality Assurance Program: Contractor shall refer to Section 01400 “Quality
Requirements” and conform to the requirements of the Quality Assurance
Program.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
2.02
2.03
RAIL
A.
Rail for special trackwork, including stock rail and closure rail, shall be premium
rail corresponding to the AREMA 115 RE rail section.
B.
Stock rails shall be 39-foot long undercut type in accordance with AREMA Plan
Basic Numbers 121-55 and 221-62, Detail 5100, or as indicated in the Contract
Drawings. Stock rails shall be bent as required in accordance with AREMA Plan
Basic Number 100.
C.
Rails shall be cut square and clean by means of rail saws, shears or abrasive
cutting wheels in accordance with the applicable current AREMA standards. All
jointed rail shall be developed from one continuous rail section.
D.
Curved rails shall be pre-curved in the shop by either gag press or roller bending
methods. The rails shall be curved to true radius throughout the designated
curve length and shall not exhibit visible kinks or tangents.
SWITCH POINTS
A.
Switch Points shall be curved split type with uniform risers as per AREMA Plan
Basic Number 121, or approved equivalent. Switch points shall have reinforcing
bars, drilled and assembled to the switch points by means of square head bolts
and hex nuts.
B.
Switch point stops shall bear against the supporting stock rails when points are in
the thrown positions.
C.
Switches shall be installed for power or manual hand-throw operation as noted in
the order or indicated on the plans.
HEEL BLOCKS
A.
Heel blocks shall be standard 5-hole design in accordance with AREMA Plan
Basic Number 221, Detail 2125.
SPECIAL TRACKWORK
02475 - 2
2.04
B.
The heel block on the straight side of the turnout (curved switch point) shall
consist of cast steel, Class B.
C.
At locations where a restraining rail in the crotch area between the stock rail and
the closure rail extends to the heel block, the heel block shall incorporate a
flangeway flare design to maintain the curve guarding for the longest possible
distance. Material for such heel blocks shall be cast manganese steel.
RAIL BRACES AND SLIDE PLATES
A.
2.05
GAUGE PLATES
A.
2.06
On ballasted track turnouts, AREMA Plan Basic Numbers 223 and 224 shall be
modified as required to accommodate a boltless brace design. Plates used on
insulated ballasted turnouts shall be furnished with insulated pads, sleeves, and
washers around the fastener anchor hole.
Gauge plates shall be 8 inches wide non-insulated type in accordance with
AREMA Plan Basic Number 223, Detail 4103. Minimum of two plates with rail
braces per switch shall be provided
TURNOUT FROGS
A.
Railbound manganese frogs shall be fabricated to the designated turnout number
geometrics in accordance with AREMA Plan Number 612-79 and related plans
as applicable.
B.
Austenitic manganese steel castings shall be of a heavy wall thickness design in
accordance with the requirements of AREMA Plan Basic Number 100, Section
M2.2, and ASTM A128, Grade A. Castings shall be explosive depth hardened in
accordance with AREMA, Specifications for Special Trackwork, Article M2.7, with
a minimum Brinell hardness of 350. Hardening shall project uniformly to 250
BHN at a depth of 11/8 inches.
C.
The Contractor shall produce shop drawings to specify the procedures to be
used for the depth hardening process, the portions of each frog which are to be
depth hardened, and the Brinell hardness pattern which the Contractor
anticipates to achieve with such procedures.
1.
Frog Guard Rail
a.
2.
Frog guardrail shall consist of a tee rail design with single
piece construction and level guardrail height. The ends of
the guardrail shall be beveled and milled. Foot guards shall
be provided.
Tie Plates
SPECIAL TRACKWORK
02475 - 3
3.
a.
Tie plates shall be insulated single rail plates either flat or
canted as required by location.
b.
Specially fabricated tie plates shall be provided with a 1:80
cant for use in transition areas between canted tie plates and
flat special trackwork tie plates. A minimum of two such
plates shall be provided at each transition section. Rail clips
and anchors shall be of similar design to those used for
standard plates.
Turnout Plates and Clips
a.
4.
2.07
Switch Rods
a.
Switch rods shall be vertical insulated switch rods supplied
by the hand throw machine manufacturer.
b.
Prior to assembly of insulated joint, the mating surface and
ends of switch rods, steel channel, and splice plates shall be
coated with an approved insulation enamel. The assembled
joints shall be dielectrically tested to verify that insulated
joints can withstand a potential of 1,500 volts dc for one
minute without evidence of flashover, pinholes, or fracture.
TURNOUT PLATES AND CLIPS
A.
2.08
Turnout plates shall be designed to accommodate the
required turnout geometry and for use with an elastic rail clip
system (Pandrol e clip) with welded on shoulders.
Turnout plates shall be designed to accommodate the required turnout geometry
and for use with an elastic rail clip system (Pandrol e-clip) with welded-on
shoulders.
LUBRICATION
A.
Lubricant for moving parts in turnouts shall meet the following requirements:
1.
Calcium soap
9%
2.
Graphite
11.5%
3.
Penetration, ASTM D217 at 700 F worked
340
4.
Dropping Point, ASTM D566 at 770 F
101/214
5.
Oil viscosity, ASTM D445, cSt at 1040 F
81.8
SPECIAL TRACKWORK
02475 - 4
B.
2.09
2.10
RAIL JOINTS
A.
All rail ends shall be fully drilled and bolted.
B.
Insulated joints shall be bonded (glued) type joints.
C.
Where a joint occurs in a guarded rail section of the turnout, a separator block
shall be provided for the full length of joint bar in between the two rails.
SWITCH TIES
A.
2.11
Switch ties in ballasted track sections shall meet the requirements specified in
Section 02457 Timber Ties and Switch Ties.
SWITCH STANDS
A.
2.12
Other types of lubricants may be used providing that the lubricant has a
documented track record of success service subject to the Engineer’s approval.
Switch stand shall be Model 1003ARS Automatic Switch Stand by National
Trackwork, Inc. Alternative manufacturers must be approved by SEPTA.
SWITCH HEATERS
A.
Switch heaters shall be tubular electric switch heaters by Rails Company.
Alternative manufacturers must be approved by SEPTA.
B.
Switch heater shall be installed at all special trackwork locations, on both rails
and shall accommodate the 16’-6” switch length.
No gas powered or air blower switch heaters will be permitted.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
DETAILED DESIGN
A.
The Contractor’s special trackwork manufacturer shall develop all required
details in accordance with these specifications and current industry standards of
good practice. Detailed shop drawings shall be provided for all components
including but not limited to frogs, switches, closure rails, stock rails, guard rails,
switch tie layouts, rail fastener assemblies and turnout plates. The Contractor
shall address the following considerations in the design of special trackwork:
1.
Tie Layouts - Detailed switch tie layouts to support the special trackwork
in ballasted track with the exact location and length of each tie shown.
Any place where there is potential that switch ties from one turnout may
interfere with switch ties of another turnout, a detailed tie layout showing
exact locations of all ties for both turnouts in one drawing shall be
developed.
SPECIAL TRACKWORK
02475 - 5
3.02
3.
Dimensions - All dimensions shall be confirmed in the field with respect to
locations where the new special trackwork must tie into existing tracks.
The location of existing joints and the amount of wear on existing rails
shall be determined so that the location of joints can be detailed on the
shop drawings.
All special trackwork shall be completely assembled in the fabrication shop in
accordance with the Construction Drawings for inspection by the Contractor’s QA
and SEPTA staff. The assembled special trackwork shall be checked to ensure
proper fit in conformance with the drawings and specifications. The throw forces
required to move the tongue rails and moveable point frog shall be measured
and documented for review by the Contractor and SEPTA.
ACCEPTANCE TESTING
A.
3.04
Rail Lengths - Design layouts with rails that are to be left longer than the
theoretical length and with blank (non-drilled) ends so that such rails can
be cut in the field to compensate for accumulated construction tolerance
deviations in assembly of the layouts.
SHOP ASSEMBLY
A.
3.03
2.
The throw forces of all switch points and moveable frog points, including all
acceptance tests at the plant, shall be measured and documented for review by
the Contractor and SEPTA. The special trackwork manufacturer shall furnish all
equipment required for measuring and recording throw forces for production
testing.
HANDLING AND DELIVERY
A.
All rails and special trackwork shall be handled carefully and delivered in open
top containers to avoid damage by kinking, bending, nicking, or other potential
damage to the rail. Rails and special trackwork components shall not be
dropped or struck sharply. Handling and delivery shall be in accordance with
accepted industry practice.
B.
Rails, special trackwork or OTM that is cut or otherwise gouged with a cutting
torch, or damaged in handling or shipment will be rejected.
C.
Stock rails, closure rails, tongue rails, and frogs shall be delivered assembled
with associated fasteners attached.
D.
Small loose parts and miscellaneous hardware shall be delivered in secure
boxes and kegs, each weighing not more than 80 pounds.
E.
All bundles, boxes and kegs shall be clearly marked with the following
information:
1.
Identification of items contained
2.
Supplier’s name
SPECIAL TRACKWORK
02475 - 6
3.05
3.
Delivery date
4.
Number of pieces
5.
Gross weight
SPECIAL TRACKWORK INSTALLATION IN BALLASTED TRACK
A.
Turnouts shall be installed at designated locations and as shown on Contract
Drawings. Construction shall be in accordance with Section 02450 Trackwork
and the following:
1.
Ballast level in cribs beneath the connecting rod, switch point rails, and
switch rods shall be at least 4 inches below any steel.
2.
Upon completion of surfacing operations switches shall be adjusted to
assure smooth operation. Switch components and slide plates shall be
cleaned and lubricated.
3.
The gauge face of outside running rail and the restraining rail face shall
be greased prior to first vehicle operation.
END OF SECTION
SPECIAL TRACKWORK
02475 - 7
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revison No. 1
SECTION 04200 - UNIT MASONRY
PART 1
1.01
GENERAL
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Concrete masonry units, including:
1. Standard concrete masonry units
2. Ground face block to match existing
B. Mortar and grout.
C. Steel reinforcing bars.
D. Masonry-joint reinforcement.
E. Ties and anchors.
F. Embedded flashing.
G. Miscellaneous masonry accessories.
H. Products Installed but not Furnished under This Section:
1. Steel lintels in unit masonry.
2. Steel shelf angles for supporting unit masonry.
1.02
RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 03300 – Cast-In-Place Concrete
B. Section 05120 – Structural Steel.
C. Section 07620 – Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.
D. Section 08100 – Metal Doors and Frames
E. Section 08331 – Overhead Coiling Doors.
F. Section 08410 – Aluminum Framed Entrances and Storefronts
G. Section 09900 – Paints and Coatings
H. Section 10522 – Fire Extinguishers, Cabinets and Accessories
UNIT MASONRY
04200 - 1
July 28, 2016
1.03
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revison No. 1
DEFINITIONS
A. CMU(s): Concrete masonry unit(s).
B. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells.
1.04
REFERENCES
A. All Masonry work shall be in accordance with SEPTA adopted codes and
other applicable references including BIA and NTMA technical notes.
B. American Concrete Institute (ACI) / American Society of Civil Engineers
(ASCE) / The Masonry Society (TMS)
1. ACI 117 Standard Specifications for Tolerance for Concrete Construction
and Materials
2. ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/ Specification for Masonry Structures.
3. TMS 602
C. American Concrete Institute (ACI)
1. ACI 315 Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement.
D. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
1. ASTM A 153 Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware.
2. ASTM A 307 Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI
Tensile Strength.
3. ASTM C 90 Specifications for Load-bearing Concrete Masonry Units.
4. ASTM C 140 Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry
Units and Related Units.
5. ASTM C 331 Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for Concrete
Masonry Units.
6. ASTM C 426 Test Method for Linear Drying Shrinkage of Concrete
Masonry Units.
7. ASTM C 549 Specification for Perlite Loose Fill Insulation
8. ASTM C 578 Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal
Insulation.
UNIT MASONRY
04200 - 2
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revison No. 1
9. ASTM C 744 Specification for Prefaced Concrete and Calcium Silicate
Masonry Units.
10. ASTM C 1093 Practice for Accreditation of Testing Agencies for Unit
Masonry.
11. ASTM C 1262 Test Method for Evaluating the Freeze-Thaw Durability of
Manufactured Concrete Masonry Units and Related Concrete Units.
12. ASTM D 2000 Classification System for Rubber Products in Automotive
Applications.
13. ASTM E 119 Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and
Materials.
1.05
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: For the following:
1. Masonry Units: Show sizes, profiles, coursing, and locations of special
shapes.
2. Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending, lap lengths, and placement of unit
masonry reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315. Show elevations of
reinforced walls.
3. Fabricated Flashing: Detail corner units, end-dam units, and other special
applications.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of the following:
1. Exposed CMUs.
2. Pigmented and colored-aggregate mortar. Make Samples using same
sand and mortar ingredients to be used on Project.
3. Weep holes and cavity vents.
4. Accessories embedded in masonry.
D. List of Materials Used in Constructing Mockups: List generic product names
together with manufacturers, manufacturers' product names, model numbers,
lot numbers, batch numbers, source of supply, and other information as
required to identify materials used. Include mix proportions for mortar and
grout and source of aggregates.
1. Submittal is for information only. Receipt of list does not constitute
UNIT MASONRY
04200 - 3
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revison No. 1
approval of deviations from the Contract Documents unless such
deviations are specifically brought to the attention of Architect and
approved in writing.
E. Qualification Data: For testing agency.
F. Material Certificates: For each type and size of the following:
1. Masonry units.
a. Include data on material properties and material test reports
substantiating compliance with requirements.
b. For masonry units used in structural masonry, include data and
calculations establishing average net-area compressive strength of
units.
2. Integral water repellent used in CMUs.
3. Cementitious materials. Include name of manufacturer, brand name, and
type.
4. Preblended, dry mortar mixes. Include description of type and proportions
of ingredients.
5. Grout mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients.
6. Reinforcing bars.
7. Joint reinforcement.
8. Anchors, ties, and metal accessories.
G. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type
and proportions of ingredients.
1. Include test reports for mortar mixes required to comply with property
specification. Test according to ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive
strength, ASTM C 1506 for water retention, and ASTM C 91/C 91M for air
content.
2. Include test reports, according to ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required
to comply with compressive strength requirement.
a. Statement of Compressive Strength of Masonry: For each combination
of masonry unit type and mortar type, provide statement of average
net-area compressive strength of masonry units, mortar type, and
resulting net-area compressive strength of masonry determined
according to TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.
UNIT MASONRY
04200 - 4
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revison No. 1
b. Cold-Weather and Hot-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of
methods, materials, and equipment to be used to comply with
requirements.
1.06
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Coordinate masonry with all trades requiring items to be built-in.
B. Particular care is to be taken in designing interfaces of masonry anchors and
waterproofing membrane and in placement of through-wall flashing to bring
any water that penetrates the system out to the exterior.
C. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1093 for
testing indicated.
D. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals,
to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials
and execution.
1. Build one mockup for all major materials, 72 inches long 60 inches high by
full thickness, including accessories.
a. Include a sealant-filled joint at least 16 inches long in each mockup.
b. Include lower corner of window/louver opening, at upper corner of wall
mockup. Make opening approximately 12 inches wide by 16 inches
high.
2. Erect mockups in the presence of the Architect/Engineer before
installation of materials.
3. Use mockup as standard of comparison for masonry work built of same
material.
4. Where masonry is to match existing, erect mockups adjacent and parallel
to existing surface.
5. Clean one-half of exposed faces of mockups with masonry cleaner as
indicated.
6. Protect accepted mockups from the elements with weather-resistant
membrane.
7. Approval of mockups is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units;
relationship of mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of
joints; and aesthetic qualities of workmanship.
a. Approval of mockups is also for other material and construction
UNIT MASONRY
04200 - 5
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revison No. 1
qualities specifically approved by Architect in writing.
b. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from
the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect
specifically approves such deviations in writing.
8. Do not destroy or move mockup until work is completed and accepted.
1.07
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not
stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof
sheeting, securely tied. If units become wet, do not install until they are dry.
B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry
location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp.
C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be
maintained and contamination avoided.
D. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers. Store
preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms in a
dry location or in covered weatherproof dispensing silos.
E. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and
accumulation of dirt and oil.
1.08
FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections,
and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially
completed masonry when construction is not in progress.
1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides of walls, and hold
cover securely in place.
2. Where one wythe of multiwythe masonry walls is completed in advance of
other wythes, secure cover a minimum of 24 inches down face next to
unconstructed wythe, and hold cover in place.
B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and
concentrated loads for at least three days after building masonry walls or
columns.
C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of
masonry to be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar,
and soil that come in contact with such masonry.
UNIT MASONRY
04200 - 6
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revison No. 1
1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by
spreading coverings on ground and over wall surface.
2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings.
3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products
with painted and integral finishes, from mortar droppings.
4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to
prevent rain from splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry.
D. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed
or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and
replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with
cold-weather
construction
requirements
contained
in
TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.
1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air
temperature is 40 deg F and higher and will remain so until masonry has
dried, but not less than seven days after completing cleaning.
2. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction
requirements contained in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.
PART 2
2.01
PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
A. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a
uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for
these characteristics, from single source from single manufacturer for each
product required.
B. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a
uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from single
manufacturer for each cementitious component and from single source or
producer for each aggregate.
2.02
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide structural unit masonry that develops indicated net-area compressive
strengths at 28 days.
1. Determine net-area compressive strength of masonry from average netarea compressive strengths of masonry units and mortar types (unitstrength method) according to TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.
UNIT MASONRY
04200 - 7
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revison No. 1
2. Determine net-area compressive strength of masonry by testing masonry
prisms according to ASTM C 1314.
2.03
UNIT MASONRY, GENERAL
A. Masonry Standard: Comply with TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6, except as
modified by requirements in the Contract Documents.
B. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain
percentage of units to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits
stated. Do not use units where such defects are exposed in the completed
Work and will be within 20 feet vertically and horizontally of a walking surface.
C. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with requirements for fire-resistance-rated
assembly designs indicated.
1. Where fire-resistance-rated construction is indicated, units shall be listed
and labeled by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
2.04
CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Normal Weight CMU: 16 inch by 8 inch face dimension by thickness
indicated on Contract Drawings. Plain face with manufacturer’s standard
color and texture.
a. Fizzano Brothers Concrete Products
b. Keystone Concrete Block and Supply
1.c.
Or approved equal
2. Groundface CMU: 16 inch by 8 inch face dimension by thickness
indicated on Contract Drawings.
a. Westbrook Concrete Block, Ground face, Color to match existing
b. Trendstone Plus, Ground face; Color to match existing
c. Or approved equal
3. Groundface CMU mortar color:
standard color options.
To be selected from manufacturer’s
B. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces
matching exposed faces of adjacent units unless otherwise indicated.
UNIT MASONRY
04200 - 8
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revison No. 1
1. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement
joints, headers, bonding, and other special conditions.
2. Provide square-edged units for outside corners unless otherwise
indicated.
C. CMUs: ASTM C 90.
1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area
compressive strength of 1900 psi
2. Density Classification: Normal weight.
3. Size (Width): Manufactured to dimensions 3/8 inch less than nominal
dimensions.
4. Exposed Faces: Provide color and texture matching the range
represented by Architect's sample.
D. Integral Water Repellent: Furnish units with integral liquid water repellent
additive for exposed unit applications, manufactured by W.R. Grace & Co.
Conn., Grace Construction Products Div., "Dry-Block," or Engineer’s
approved equal.
1. Where block is furnished with integral water repellent, assemblies shall
include mortar containing water repellent additive by same manufacturer.
2.05
MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS
A. Portland cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I or II, except Type III may be
used for cold-weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as
required to produce mortar color indicated.
1. Alkali content shall not be more than 0.1 percent when tested according to
ASTM C 114.
a. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
b. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and
hydrated lime containing no other ingredients.
c. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91/C 91M.
d. Mortar Cement: ASTM C 1329/C 1329M.
e. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium
oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes and complying with
ASTM C 979/C 979M. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory
performance in masonry mortar.
UNIT MASONRY
04200 - 9
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revison No. 1
f. Colored Cement Products: Packaged blend made from portland
cement and hydrated lime or masonry cement and mortar pigments, all
complying with specified requirements, and containing no other
ingredients.
1) Formulate blend as required to produce color indicated or, if not
indicated, as selected from manufacturer's standard colors.
2) Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of portland cement by weight.
3) Pigments shall not exceed 5 percent of masonry cement or mortar
cement by weight.
g. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144.
1) For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate
consisting of natural sand or crushed stone.
2) For joints less than 1/4 inch thick, use aggregate graded with 100
percent passing the No. 16 sieve.
3) White-Mortar Aggregates: Natural white sand or crushed white
stone.
4) Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone of color
necessary to produce required mortar color.
h. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.
i.
2.06
Water: Potable.
REINFORCEMENT
A. Stainless Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Type 316. Stainless
Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Type 316.
B. Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Wire units designed to fit into mortar bed joints
spanning masonry unit cells and to hold reinforcing bars in center of cells.
Units are formed from 0.148-inch stainless steel wire0.148-inch stainless
steel wire. Provide units designed for number of bars indicated.
1. Masonry-Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951/A 951M.
a. Interior Walls: Stainless Steel Stainless Steel.
b. Exterior Walls: Stainless Steel Stainless Steel.
c. Wire Size for Side Rods: 0.187-inch diameter.
UNIT MASONRY
04200 - 10
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revison No. 1
d. Wire Size for Cross Rods: 0.148-inch diameter.
e. Wire Size for Veneer Ties: 0.148-inch diameter.
f. Spacing of Cross Rods, Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 16
inches o.c.
g. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet, with prefabricated corner
and tee units.
C. Masonry-Joint Reinforcement for Single-Wythe Masonry: Ladder type with
single pair of side rods.
2.07
EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS
A. Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing complying with Section 07620 "Sheet
Metal Flashing and Trim" and as follows:
1. Copper: ASTM B 370, Temper H00, cold-rolled copper sheet, 16-oz. /sq.
ft. weight or 0.0216 inch thick or ASTM B 370, Temper H01, high-yield
copper sheet, 12-oz. /sq. ft. weight or 0.0162 inch thick.
2. Fabricate through-wall flashing with drip edge where indicated. Fabricate
by extending flashing 1/2 inch out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30
degrees and hemmed.
3. Fabricate through-wall flashing with sealant stop where indicated.
Fabricate by bending metal back on itself 3/4 inch at exterior face of wall
and down into joint 1/4 inch to form a stop for retaining sealant backer
rod.
a. Fabricate metal drip edges from stainless steel or copper (refer to
contract drawings for locations of each material.) Extend at least 3
inches into wall and 1/2 inch out from wall, with outer edge bent down
30 degrees and hemmed.
b. Fabricate metal sealant stops from stainless steel. Extend at least 3
inches into wall and out to exterior face of wall. At exterior face of wall,
bend metal back on itself for 3/4 inch and down into joint 1/4 inch to
form a stop for retaining sealant backer rod.
c. Fabricate metal expansion-joint strips from stainless steel to shapes
indicated.
d. Solder metal items at corners.
B. Application: Unless otherwise indicated, use the following:
UNIT MASONRY
04200 - 11
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revison No. 1
1. Where flashing is indicated to receive counterflashing, use metal flashing.
2. Where flashing is indicated to be turned down at or beyond the wall face,
use metal flashing.
3. Where flashing is partly exposed and is indicated to terminate at the wall
face, use metal flashing with a drip edge.
4. Where flashing is fully concealed, use metal flashing.
C. Single-Wythe CMU Flashing System: System of CMU cell flashing pans and
interlocking CMU web covers made from UV-resistant, high-density
polyethylene. Cell flashing pans have integral weep spouts designed to be
built into mortar bed joints and that extend into the cell to prevent clogging
with mortar.
D. Solder and Sealants for Sheet Metal Flashings: As specified in Section 07620
"Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."
E. Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's
standard products or products recommended by flashing manufacturer for
bonding flashing sheets to each other and to substrates.
F. Termination Bars for Flexible Flashing: Stainless-steel sheet 0.019 inch by 11/2 inches with a 3/8 inch sealant flange at top.
G. Termination Bars for Flexible Flashing: Aluminum sheet 0.064 inch by 1-1/2
inches with a 3/8-inch sealant flange at top.
2.08
MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES
A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056,
Grade 2A1; compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated;
formulated from neoprene.
B. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Made from styrene-butadiene-rubber
compound, complying with ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805 and
designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry
wall; size and configuration as indicated.
C. Bond-Breaker
Strips:
Asphalt-saturated
felt
ASTM D 226/D 226M, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt).
complying
with
D. Weep/Cavity Vent Products: Use the following unless otherwise indicated:
1. Rectangular Plastic Weep/Vent Tubing: Clear butyrate, 3/8 by 1-1/2 by 31/2 inches long.
UNIT MASONRY
04200 - 12
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revison No. 1
2. Mesh Weep/Vent: Free-draining mesh; made from polyethylene strands,
full height and width of head joint and depth 1/8 inch less than depth of
outer wythe; in color selected from manufacturer's standard, color to
match the mortar.
E. Cavity Drainage Material: Free-draining mesh, made from polymer strands
that will not degrade within the wall cavity.
1. Configuration: Provide one of the following:
a. Strips, full depth of cavity and 10 inches high, with dovetail-shaped
notches 7 inches deep that prevent clogging with mortar droppings.
2.09
MASONRY-CELL FILL
A. Lightweight-Aggregate Fill: ASTM C 331/C 331M.
2.10
MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents,
accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or
other admixtures unless otherwise indicated.
1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.
2. Use portland cement-lime mortar unless otherwise indicated.
3. For exterior masonry, use portland cement-lime mortar.
4. For reinforced masonry, use portland cement-lime mortar.
5. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will
be exposed to view, regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that
mortar color is consistent.
6. All mortar shall be mixed from Portland cement, lime, sand and potable
water only. No masonry cement or mortar cement products will be
accepted for concrete masonry unit construction.
B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a
preblended mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate
proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to Project site.
C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification.
Provide the following types of mortar for applications stated unless another
type is indicated
1. For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type M.
UNIT MASONRY
04200 - 13
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revison No. 1
2. For reinforced masonry, use Type S.
3. For mortar parge coats, use Type S.
4. For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and nonload-bearing walls and
parapet walls; for interior load-bearing walls; for interior nonload-bearing
partitions; and for other applications where another type is not indicated,
use Type N.
5. For interior nonload-bearing partitions, Type O may be used instead of
Type N.
D. Pigmented Mortar: Use colored cement product or select and proportion
pigments with other ingredients to produce color required. Do not add
pigments to colored cement products.
1. Pigments may be added to mortar to obtain colored mortars, provided that
they are produced specifically for use in mortar mixes and they can be
demonstrated to have been successfully employed for this purpose. All
colored mortars must be pre-approved by SEPTA.
2. Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of portland cement by weight.
3. Pigments shall not exceed 5 percent of masonry cement or mortar cement
by weight.
4. Mix to match Architect's sample.
5. Application: Use pigmented mortar for exposed mortar joints as indicated
on Contract Drawings.
E. Colored-Aggregate Mortar: Produce required mortar color by using colored
aggregates and natural color or white cement as necessary to produce
required mortar color.
1. Mix to match Architect's sample.
2. Application: Use colored-aggregate mortar for exposed mortar joints as
indicated on Contract Drawings.
F. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476.
1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or
coarse) that will comply with TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 for dimensions
of grout spaces and pour height.
2. Proportion grout in accordance with ASTM C 476, with a minimum
compressive strength of 3000 psi and installed in accordance with ACI531 for high or low lift procedures.
UNIT MASONRY
04200 - 14
July 28, 2016
2.11
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revison No. 1
MASONRY CLEANERS
A. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner
designed for removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new
construction stains from new masonry without discoloring or damaging
masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use by
cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned.
PART 3
3.01
EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements
for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the
Work.
1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing
conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.
2. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified.
3. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed.
4. Verify that substrates are free of substances that impair mortar bond.
B. Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction for piping
systems to verify actual locations of piping connections.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.02
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Thickness: Build single-wythe walls to actual widths of masonry units, using
units of widths indicated.
B. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other
Sections.
C. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry.
After installing equipment, complete masonry to match construction
immediately adjacent to opening.
D. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a
continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven
saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying
unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and,
UNIT MASONRY
04200 - 15
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revison No. 1
where possible, cut edges concealed.
E. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform
blend of colors and textures. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they
are placed.
3.03
TOLERANCES
A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements:
1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation, do not vary by more than
plus 1/2 inch or minus 1/4 inch.
2. For location of elements in plan, do not vary from that indicated by more
than plus or minus 1/2 inch.
3. For location of elements in elevation, do not vary from that indicated by
more than plus or minus 1/4 inch in a story height or 1/2 inch total.
B. Lines and Levels:
1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls, do not vary from level by
more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.
2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and
reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in
20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.
3. For vertical lines and surfaces, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4
inch in 10 feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.
4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs,
reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more
than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.
5. For lines and surfaces, do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in
10 feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.
6. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by
more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet or 1/2-inch maximum.
C. Joints:
1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or
minus 1/8 inch, with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch.
2. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from bed-joint thickness of adjacent
courses by more than 1/8 inch.
UNIT MASONRY
04200 - 16
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revison No. 1
3. For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more
than plus 3/8 inch or minus 1/4 inch.
4. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more
than plus or minus 1/8 inch. Do not vary from adjacent bed-joint and headjoint thicknesses by more than 1/8 inch.
5. For exposed bed joints and head joints of stacked bond, do not vary from
a straight line by more than 1/16 inch from one masonry unit to the next.
3.04
LAYING MASONRY WALLS
A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with
uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movementtype joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units,
particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations.
B. Coursing shall be coordinated with windows and door heads so that fractions
of courses are avoided at openings.
C. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed
masonry in running bond do not use units with less-than-nominal 4-inch
horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.
D. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by
lapping not less than 4 inches. Bond and interlock each course of each wythe
at corners. Do not use units with less-than-nominal 4-inch horizontal face
dimensions at corners or jambs.
E. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by stepping back units in each
course from those in course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean
masonry surfaces that are to receive mortar, remove loose masonry units and
mortar, and wet masonry if required before laying fresh masonry.
F. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and
other Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.
G. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar unless
otherwise indicated.
H. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units,
place a layer of metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below, and
rod mortar or grout into core.
I. Fill cores in hollow CMUs with grout 24 inches under bearing plates, beams,
lintels, posts, and similar items unless otherwise indicated.
J. Build nonload-bearing interior partitions full height of story to underside of
UNIT MASONRY
04200 - 17
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revison No. 1
solid floor or roof structure above unless otherwise indicated.
1. Install compressible filler in joint between top of partition and underside of
structure above.
2. Fasten partition top anchors to structure above and build into top of
partition. Grout cells of CMUs solidly around plastic tubes of anchors and
push tubes down into grout to provide 1/2-inch clearance between end of
anchor rod and end of tube. Space anchors 48 inches o.c. unless
otherwise indicated.
3. Wedge nonload-bearing partitions against structure above with small
pieces of tile, slate, or metal. Fill joint with mortar after dead-load
deflection of structure above approaches final position.
3.05
MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING
A. Lay CMUs as follows:
1. Bed face shells in mortar and make head joints of depth equal to bed
joints.
2. Bed webs in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters.
3. Bed webs in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on
footings.
4. Fully bed entire units, including areas under cells, at starting course on
footings where cells are not grouted.
5. Fully bed units and fill cells with mortar at anchors and ties as needed to
fully embed anchors and ties in mortar.
B. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter
ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not
deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints.
C. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer
larger than joint thickness unless otherwise indicated.
D. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied
finishes (other than paint) unless otherwise indicated.
E. Cut joints flush where indicated to receive waterproofing unless otherwise
indicated.
3.06
MASONRY-CELL FILL
UNIT MASONRY
04200 - 18
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revison No. 1
A. Pour lightweight-aggregate fill into cavities to fill void spaces. Maintain
inspection ports to show presence of fill at extremities of each pour area.
Close the ports after filling has been confirmed. Limit the fall of fill to one
story high, but not more than 20 feet.
B. Install molded-polystyrene insulation units into masonry unit cells before
laying units.
3.07
MASONRY-JOINT REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a
minimum cover of 5/8 inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap
reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches.
1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches o.c.
2. Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches o.c. in foundation walls and
parapet walls.
3. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches above and below wall
openings and extending 12 inches beyond openings in addition to
continuous reinforcement.
B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints unless otherwise
indicated.
C. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T and L-shaped
units.
D. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units.
E. Cut and bend reinforcing units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at
corners, returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other
special conditions.
F. All structural reinforcement shall conform to ASTM A615 grade 60 and shall
be epoxy coated according to ASTM A775
3.08
ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL STEEL AND CONCRETE
A. Anchor masonry to structural steel and concrete, where masonry abuts or
faces structural steel or concrete, to comply with the following:
1. Provide an open space not less than 1/2 inch wide between masonry and
structural steel or concrete unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space
free of mortar and other rigid materials.
UNIT MASONRY
04200 - 19
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revison No. 1
2. Anchor masonry with anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached
to structure.
3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24 inches o.c. vertically
and 36 inches o.c. horizontally.
3.09
CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS
A. General: Install control- and expansion-joint materials in unit masonry as
masonry progresses. Do not allow materials to span control and expansion
joints without provision to allow for in-plane wall or partition movement.
B. Form control joints in concrete masonry using one of the following methods:
1. Fit bond-breaker strips into hollow contour in ends of CMUs on one side of
control joint. Fill resultant core with grout, and rake out joints in exposed
faces for application of sealant.
2. Install preformed control-joint gaskets designed to fit standard sash block.
3. Install interlocking units designed for control joints. Install bond-breaker
strips at joint. Keep head joints free and clear of mortar, or rake out joint
for application of sealant.
4. Install temporary foam-plastic filler in head joints, and remove filler when
unit masonry is complete for application of sealant.
3.10
LINTELS
A. Install steel and CMU lintels where indicated.
B. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches at each jamb unless otherwise
indicated.
3.11
FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, AND CAVITY VENTS
A. Placement of reinforcement, veneer anchors, flashing, and similar items to be
built into masonry systems are to be coordinated by the system installers.
B. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf
angles, lintels, ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall,
and where indicated. Install cavity vents at shelf angles, ledges, and other
obstructions to upward flow of air in cavities, and where indicated.
C. Install flashing as follows unless otherwise indicated:
1. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections
UNIT MASONRY
04200 - 20
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revison No. 1
that could puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place
through-wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar.
Before covering with mortar, seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive,
sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer.
2. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 6 inches into
masonry at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 6 inches at ends
and turn up not less than 2 inches to form end dams.
3. Interlock end joints of ribbed sheet metal flashing by overlapping ribs not
less than 1-1/2 inches or as recommended by flashing manufacturer, and
seal lap with elastomeric sealant complying with requirements in
Section 07900 “Joint Sealers” for application indicated.
4. Install metal drip edges and sealant stops with ribbed sheet metal flashing
by interlocking hemmed edges to form hooked seam. Seal seam with
elastomeric sealant complying with requirements in Section 07900 "Joint
Sealers" for application indicated.
5. Install metal drip edges beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall.
Stop flexible flashing 1/2 inch back from outside face of wall, and adhere
flexible flashing to top of metal drip edge.
6. Install metal flashing termination beneath flexible flashing at exterior face
of wall. Stop flexible flashing 1/2 inch back from outside face of wall, and
adhere flexible flashing to top of metal flashing termination.
7. Cut flexible flashing off flush with face of wall after masonry wall
construction is completed.
D. Install single-wythe CMU flashing system in bed joints of CMU walls where
indicated to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install CMU cell
pans with upturned edges located below face shells and webs of CMUs
above and with weep spouts aligned with face of wall. Install CMU web
covers so that they cover upturned edges of CMU cell pans at CMU webs
and extend from face shell to face shell.
E. Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related construction where
they are shown to be built into masonry.
F. Install weep holes in exterior wythes and veneers in head joints of first course
of masonry immediately above embedded flashing.
1. Use specified weep/cavity vent products to form weep holes.
2. Use wicking material to form weep holes above flashing under masonry
sills. Turn wicking down at lip of sill to be as inconspicuous as possible.
3. Space weep holes formed from plastic tubing or wicking material 16
UNIT MASONRY
04200 - 21
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revison No. 1
inches o.c.
4. Cover cavity side of weep holes with plastic insect screening at cavities
insulated with loose-fill insulation.
5. Trim wicking material flush with outside face of wall after mortar has set.
G. Place pea gravel in cavities as soon as practical to a height equal to height of
first course above top of flashing, but not less than 2 inches, to maintain
drainage.
1. Fill cavities full height by placing pea gravel in cavities as masonry is laid,
so that at any point, masonry does not extend more than 24 inches above
top of pea gravel.
H. Place cavity drainage material in airspace behind veneers to comply with
configuration requirements for cavity drainage material in "Miscellaneous
Masonry Accessories" Article.
I. Install cavity vents in head joints in exterior wythes at spacing indicated. Use
specified weep/cavity vent products to form cavity vents.
1. Close cavities off vertically and horizontally with blocking in manner
indicated. Install through-wall flashing and weep holes above horizontal
blocking.
3.12
REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION
A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed
to support reinforced masonry elements during construction.
1. Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed
masonry as indicated. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of
mortar and grout. Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain position and
shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry.
2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have
hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and that of other loads that
may be placed on them during construction.
B. Placing
Reinforcement:
TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.
Comply
with
requirements
in
C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has
attained enough strength to resist grout pressure.
1. Comply with requirements in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 for cleanouts
and for grout placement, including minimum grout space and maximum
UNIT MASONRY
04200 - 22
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revison No. 1
pour height.
2. Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 60 inches.
3.13
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage special inspectors to perform tests
and inspections and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding
and work areas as needed to perform tests and inspections. Retesting of
materials that fail to comply with specified requirements shall be done at
Contractor's expense.
B. Inspections:
Special
inspections
TMS 402/ACI 530/ASCE 5.
according
to
Level
B
in
1. Begin masonry construction only after inspectors have verified proportions
of site-prepared mortar.
2. Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces
and of grades, sizes, and locations of reinforcement.
3. Place grout only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared
grout.
a. Testing Prior to Construction: One set of tests.
b. Testing Frequency: One set of tests for each 5000 sq. ft. of wall area
or portion thereof.
C. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, according to
ASTM C 140 for compressive strength.
D. Mortar Aggregate Ratio Test (Proportion Specification): For each mix
provided, according to ASTM C 780.
E. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix provided, according to
ASTM C 780. Test mortar for mortar air content and compressive strength.
F. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix provided, according to
ASTM C 1019.
G. Prism Test: For each type of construction provided, according to
ASTM C 1314 at 7 days and at 28 days.
3.14
PARGING
A. Parge exterior faces of below-grade masonry walls, where indicated, in two
uniform coats to a total thickness of 3/4 inch. Dampen wall before applying
UNIT MASONRY
04200 - 23
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revison No. 1
first coat, and scarify first coat to ensure full bond to subsequent coat.
B. Use a steel-trowel finish to produce a smooth, flat, dense surface with a
maximum surface variation of 1/8 inch per foot. Form a wash at top of
parging and a cove at bottom.
C. Damp-cure parging for at least 24 hours and protect parging until cured.
3.15
REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING
A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained,
or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units
to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence
of replacement.
B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep
holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners,
openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance.
Prepare joints for sealant application, where indicated.
C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry
brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.
D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed
masonry as follows:
1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and
nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels.
2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel
uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of
sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry.
3. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners
promptly by rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water.
4. Clean concrete masonry by applicable cleaning methods indicated in
NCMA TEK 8-4A.
3.16
MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL
A. Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials
are Contractor's property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from
Project site.
B. Waste Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including
excess or soil-contaminated sand, waste mortar, and broken masonry units,
UNIT MASONRY
04200 - 24
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revison No. 1
by crushing and mixing with fill material as fill is placed.
1. Crush masonry waste to less than 4 inches in each dimension.
2. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches of finished grade.
C. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot
be used as fill, as described above or recycled, and other masonry waste,
and legally dispose of off Owner's property.
END OF SECTION
UNIT MASONRY
04200 - 25
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revison No. 1
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK
UNIT MASONRY
04200 - 26
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
SECTION 07720 - ROOF ACCESSORIES
PART 1
1.01
GENERAL
DESCRIPTION
A. Section Includes:
1. Roof curbs and equipment supports
2. Roof Hatches
3. Smoke Vents
4. Freestanding Roof Edge Protection System
1.02
RELATED WORK
A. Section 06820 – Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Products
B. Section 07200 – Thermal Protection
C. Section 07510 – Built Up Bituminous Roofing
D. Section 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim
1.03
STANDARDS AND REGULATIONS
A. International Building Code, current edition
B. International Energy Conservation Code, current edition
C. All other applicable local codes
1.04
QUALITY CONTROL
A. Roof curbs and equipment supports to be provided by Mechanical Contractor
and installed by General Contractor.
B. Products shall be provided by a firm specializing in the fabrication of the roof
accessories indicated.
1.05
SUBMITTALS
A. Shop drawings for the fabrication and installation of custom fabricated roof
ROOF ACCESSORIES
07720 - 1
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
accessory units. Show jointing, anchorage, accessory items and shop
finishes.
Indicate dimensions, weights, loadings, required clearances,
method of field assembly, and components. Include plans, elevations,
sections, details, and attachments to other Work.
B. Manufacturer's or fabricator's standard drawings and installation instructions
for each roof accessory.
C. Certification of fire-resistance ratings as required for the various assemblies.
D. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction
details, materials, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and
finishes.
E. Coordination Drawings:
Roof plans drawn to scale and coordinating
penetrations and roof-mounted items. Show the following:
1. Size and location of roof accessories specified in this Section.
2. Method of attaching roof accessories to roof or building structure.
3. Other roof-mounted items including mechanical and electrical equipment,
ductwork, piping, and conduit.
F. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer’s color charts showing the full
range of colors available for roof accessories with factory-applied color
finishes.
G. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared
on Samples in manufacturer’s standard sizes, and of same thickness and
material indicated for the Work. If finishes involve normal color or shade
variations, include sample sets showing the full range of variations expected.
H. All submittals are to be in accordance with Section 01300 – Submittals.
1.06
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened containers or
packages with labels intact and legible.
B. Stack pre-formed and pre-finished material to prevent twisting, bending, or
abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope metal sheets to ensure drainage.
C. Prevent contact with materials which may cause discoloration or staining.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
ROOF ACCESSORIES
07720 - 2
July 28, 2016
2.01
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
ROOF CURBS
A. General: Provide roof curbs capable of supporting superimposed live and
dead loads, including equipment loads and other construction to be supported
on roof curbs. Coordinate dimensions with rough-in information or Shop
Drawings of equipment to be supported.
B. Fabrication: Unless otherwise indicated or required for strength, fabricate
units from minimum 18 ga. Galvanized steel with welded and mitered corner
joints.
1. Provide preservative-treated wood nailers at tops of curbs and formed
flange at perimeter bottom for mounting to roof.
2. On ribbed or fluted metal roofs, form flange at perimeter bottom to
conform to roof profile.
3. Provide manufacturer’s standard rigid or semi-rigid insulation where
indicated.
4. Provide formed cants and base profile coordinated with roof insulation
thickness.
5. Fabricate units to minimum height of 10 inches above finished roof, unless
otherwise indicated.
6. Units shall be factory insulated 1-1/2” thick minimum three pound density
fiberglass insulation.
2.02
EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. General: Provide equipment supports capable of supporting superimposed
live and dead loads, including equipment loads and other construction to be
supported.
Coordinate dimensions with rough-in information or Shop
Drawings of equipment to be supported.
B. Fabrication: Unless otherwise indicated or required for strength, fabricate
units from minimum 0.063-inch0 (1.6-mm-) thick, sheet aluminum with welded
corner joints.
1. Provide preservative-treated wood nailers at tops of curbs and formed
flange at perimeter bottom for mounting to roof.
2. On ribbed or fluted metal roofs, form flange at perimeter bottom to
conform to roof profile.
3. Fabricate units to minimum height of 8 inches (200 mm), unless otherwise
ROOF ACCESSORIES
07720 - 3
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
indicated.
4. Sloping Roofs: Where slope of roof deck exceeds ¼ inch per foot (1:48),
fabricate support units with height tapered to match sloe to level tops of
units.
2.03
ROOF HATCH
A. Furnish and install metal roof hatches of width: 36" x length: 36". Length
denotes hinge side. The roof hatch shall be single leaf. The roof hatch shall
be pre-assembled from the manufacturer.
B. Manufacturer:
1. Basis-of-Design: Type E-50TB Roof Hatch by The BILCO Company, P.O.
Box 1203, New Haven, CT 06505, 1-800-366-6530, Fax: 1-203-933-8478,
Web: www.bilco.com.
2. Or Approved Equal.
C. Performance characteristics:
1. Cover and curb shall be thermally broken to prevent heat transfer between
interior and exterior surfaces.
2. Cover shall be reinforced to support a minimum live load of 40 psf
(195kg/m2) with a maximum deflection of 1/150th of the span or 20 psf
(97kg/m2) wind uplift.
3. Operation of the cover shall be smooth and easy with controlled operation
throughout the entire arc of opening and closing.
4. Operation of the cover shall not be affected by temperature.
5. Entire hatch shall be weather tight with fully welded corner joints on cover
and curb.
D. Cover: Shall be 11 gauge (2.3mm) aluminum with a 5” (127mm) beaded
flange with formed reinforcing members. Interior and exterior surfaces shall
be thermally broken to minimize heat transfer and to resist condensation.
Cover shall have a heavy extruded EPDM rubber gasket bonded to the cover
interior to assure a continuous seal when compressed to the top surface of
the curb.
E. Cover insulation: Shall be 3” (75mm) thick polyisocyanurate with an R-value =
18 (U=0.315 W/m2K), fully covered and protected by an 18 gauge (1mm)
aluminum liner.
ROOF ACCESSORIES
07720 - 4
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
F. Curb: Shall be 12” (305mm) in height and of 11 gauge (2.3mm) aluminum.
Interior and exterior surfaces shall be thermally broken to minimize heat
transfer and to resist condensation. The curb shall be formed with a 5-1/2”
(140mm) flange with 7/16” (11mm) holes provided for securing to the roof
deck. The curb shall be equipped with an integral metal capflashing of the
same gauge and material as the curb, fully welded at the corners, with
flashing system, including stamped tabs, 6” (153mm) on center, to be bent
inward to hold roofing securely in place.
G. Curb insulation: Shall be 3” (75mm) thick polyisocyanurate with an R-value =
18 (U=0.315 W/m2K).
H. Lifting mechanisms: Manufacturer shall provide compression spring operators
enclosed in telescopic tubes to provide, smooth, easy, and controlled cover
operation throughout the entire arc of opening and closing. The upper tube
shall be the outer tube to prevent accumulation of moisture, grit, and debris
inside the lower tube assembly. The lower tube shall interlock with a flanged
support shoe welded to the curb assembly.
I. Hardware
1. Heavy stainless steel pintle hinges shall be provided
2. Cover shall be equipped with a spring latch with interior and exterior turn
handles.
3. Roof hatch shall be equipped with interior and exterior padlock hasps.
4. The latch strike shall be a stamped component bolted to the curb
assembly.
5. Cover shall automatically lock in the open position with a rigid hold open
arm equipped with a 1” (25mm) diameter red vinyl grip handle to permit
easy release for closing.
6. Compression spring tubes shall be an anti-corrosive composite material
and all other hardware shall be zinc plated and chromate sealed.
7. Cover hardware shall be bolted into heavy gauge channel reinforcing
welded to the underside of the cover and concealed within the insulation
space.
J. Finishes: Factory finish shall be mill finish aluminum.
2.04
AUTOMATIC ROOF FIRE VENT
A. Furnish and install where indicated on plans metal fire vent Type DSH, size
4’-0” x 48’-0”. Length denotes hinge side. The roof fire vent shall be double
ROOF ACCESSORIES
07720 - 5
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
leaf and preassembled from the manufacturer.
B. Manufacturer:
1. Basis-of-Design: Type DSH Automatic Roof Smoke Vent by The Bilco
Company, P.O. Box 1203, New Haven, CT 06505, 1-800-366-6530, Fax:
1-203-933-8478, Web: www.bilco.com
2. Or Approved Equal.
C. Performance characteristics:
1. Vent shall be UL listed. Comply with UL 793 and UL 790 Class A (burning
brand test).
2. Operation: Vent covers shall open simultaneously against a 10 psf
(49kg/m2) snow/wind load when latch is manually released or when heat
breaks the UL listed fusible link. Opening shall be in a controlled manner
to avoid damage to surrounding roof surfaces.
3. Latch operation: When heat parts the UL listed fusible link, the latch shall
release instantaneously, allowing vent cover to open. The latch shall be
designed for easy resetting, after a fire or test, so that the cover cannot be
latched closed unless the mechanism has been reset properly.
Manufacturer shall provide instructions for resetting the latch with each
unit. Latch mechanism shall hold the covers in the closed position without
overstressing the fusible link and withstand 90 psf (438kg/m2) wind uplift
forces acting on the covers.
4. Covers shall be reinforced to support a minimum live load of 40 psf
(195kg/m2) with a maximum deflection of 1/150th of the span or 20 psf
(97kg/m2) wind uplift.
5. Entire roof fire vent shall be weather tight with fully welded corner joints on
cover and curb.
D. Covers: Shall be 14 gauge (1.9mm) paint bond G-90 galvanized steel with a
3” (76mm) beaded flange with formed reinforcing members.
E. Cover insulation: Shall be fiberglass of 1” (25mm) thickness, fully covered and
protected by a metal liner 22 gauge (.8mm) paint bond G-90 galvanized steel.
F. Curb: Shall be 12” (305mm) in height and of 14 gauge (1.9mm) paint bond G90 galvanized steel. Curb shall be formed with a 3-1/2” (89mm) flange with
7/16” (11mm) holes provided for securing to roof deck. Curb shall be
equipped with integral metal cap flashing of the same gauge and material as
the curb and flashing system, including stamped tabs, 6” (153mm) on center,
to be bent inward to hold roofing plies securely in place. Curb shall have a
ROOF ACCESSORIES
07720 - 6
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
heavy extruded EPDM rubber gasket that is mechanically fastened to the top
of the curb to assure a continuous seal when compressed by the covers.
G. Curb insulation: Shall be rigid, high-density fiberboard of 1” (25mm) thickness
on the outside of curb.
H. Lifting mechanisms: Manufacturer shall provide high performance gas spring
operators to open the covers against a snow/wind load. Gas springs shall
automatically lock covers in the fully open position. A release mechanism
shall be provided to allow covers to be closed. Gas springs shall have integral
dampers to assure a controlled rate of cover opening and have a cyclic
durability of 50,000 cycles.
I. Latch mechanism: Shall include a positive hold/release mechanism with a
separate latching point for each cover controlled by a single UL listed 165°F
(74°C) fusible link. Fusible link shall be curb mounted on a non-hinged end to
allow the latching mechanism to be easily reset from the roof level.
1. Basis of Design: Bilco Thermoloatch II
2. Or Approved Equal.
J. Hardware
1. Heavy pintle hinges shall be provided.
2. Gas springs have a powder coated outer tube and chromate plated inner
rod. All other hardware is zinc plated/chromate sealed or galvanized steel.
3. Cover hardware shall be bolted into heavy gauge channel reinforcing
welded to the underside of the cover and concealed within the insulation
space.
K. Manual pull release cables: Interior and exterior cables with red vinyl grips
shall be provided and allow the unit to be opened without disturbing the
fusible link.
L. Finishes: Factory finish shall be alkyd based red oxide primed steel.
2.05
FREESTANDING ROOF EDGE PROTECTION SYSTEM
A. Manufacturer:
1. Kee Safety, Inc.
2. Or approved equal.
B. Systems
ROOF ACCESSORIES
07720 - 7
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
1. Provide pipe or tubing, fittings, and accessories as indicated or required to
match design indicated on the Drawings.
2. Fittings: Cast iron.
3. Handrail Pipe, Schedule 40, Size:
a. 1-1/2 inches - 1.90 inches (48 mm) O D.
C. Roof Edge Protection: Provide freestanding Roof Edge Protection System,
including pipe railings, uprights, bases, counterweights and fittings.
1. Freestanding counterweighted guardrail system with 42 inch (1067 mm)
minimum height to provide a pedestrian egress barrier on the roof to
withstand a minimum load of 200 lb (90719 g) in any direction to the top
rail per OSHA Regulation 29 CFR 1910.23.
2. Pipe: Steel, 1-1/2 inches (48 mm) schedule 40, galvanized.
3. Rails and Posts: Galvanized Tube, 12 gauge, 1-1/2 inches 1.90 inches (38
mm) diameter.
4. Counterweight Levers: Galvanized Tube, 12 gauge, 1-1/4 inches 1.660
inches (38 mm) diameter.
5. Mounting Bases: Steel bases are galvanized and are supplied with a
rubber pad on underside of the component.
6. Counterweights: Molded recycled PVC with one fixing collar per
counterbalance.
7. Fasteners: stainless steel.
8. Custom Design: Provide pipe, fittings, and accessories as indicated or
required by Drawings to match design indicated.
D. Materials:
1. Steel Pipe: Steel, 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) schedule 40, galvanized.
2. Fittings, Including Elbows, Crossovers, Wall flanges, Tees, Couplings:
a. Galvanized Malleable Cast Iron: Structural pipe fittings, ASTM A447
with ASTM A153 galvanizing.
3. Finish: Polyester factory applied spray coating.
4. Fasteners: Type 304 stainless steel.
ROOF ACCESSORIES
07720 - 8
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
E. Fabrication:
1. Fit and shop assemble components in largest practical sizes for delivery to
site.
2. Upright tops shall be plugged with weather and light resistant material.
3. Assemble components with joints tightly fitted and secured. Accurately
form components to suit installation.
PART 3
3.01
EXECUTION
PREPARATION
A. Transmit submittals required by this section.
B. Furnish products as indicated.
C. Ensure that substrates are in suitable condition to receive the work.
3.02
INSTALLATION
A. Install roof accessory in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Set
each unit level and plumb, true to line. Anchor accessories securely to the
substrate.
B. Set flanges of units in roofing mastic, and leave surfaces smooth and clean
for application of metal roofing and flashing.
Provide manufacturer's
recommended method for watertight attachment to pre-finished metal roofing.
3.03
INSTALLATION ROOF CURBS/EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Roof curbs and equipment supports to be provided by Mechanical Contractor
and installed by General Contractor.
B. General: Comply with manufacturer’s written instructions. Coordinate
installation of roof accessories with installation of roof deck, roof insulation,
flashing, roofing membranes, penetrations, equipment, and other construction
involving roof accessories to ensure that each element of the Work performs
properly and that combined elements are waterproof and weather tight.
Anchor roof accessories securely to supporting structural substrates so they
are capable of withstanding lateral and thermal stresses, and inward and
outward loading pressures.
C. Install roof accessory items according to construction details of NRCA’s
ROOF ACCESSORIES
07720 - 9
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
“Roofing and Waterproofing Manual,” unless otherwise indicated.
D. Separation: Separate metal from incompatible metal or corrosive substrates,
including wood, by coating concealed surfaces, at locations of contact, with
bituminous coating or providing other permanent separation.
E. Flange Seals: Unless otherwise indicated, set flanges of accessory units in a
thick bed of roofing cement to form a seal.
F. Cap Flashing: Where required as component of accessory, install cap
flashing to provide waterproof overlap with roofing or roof flashing (as counter
flashing). Seal overlap with thick bead of mastic sealant.
G. Ridge Vents: Install according to manufacturer’s written instructions.
3.04
INSTALLATION OF AUTOMATIC ROOF FIRE VENT AND ROOF HATCH
A. Install products in strict accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and
approved submittals. Locate units level, plumb, and in proper alignment with
adjacent work.
1. Test units for proper function and adjust until proper operation is achieved.
2. Test fusible link and install replacement fusible link after testing.
3. Repair finishes damaged during installation.
4. Restore finishes so no evidence remains of corrective work.
3.05
INSTALLATION OF FREESTANDING RAILINGS
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight joints. For all
connections with fittings, each set screw is to be tightened to 29 foot pounds
(39 N-m) of torque.
C. Perform cutting, and fitting required for installation of handrails. Set handrails
and accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from
established lines and levels.
3.06
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean exposed surfaces according to manufacturer’s written instructions.
Touch up damaged metal coatings.
END OF SECTION
ROOF ACCESSORIES
07720 - 10
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
SECTION 08450 - TRANSLUCENT PANEL WALL UNIT SYSTEM
PART 1
1.01
GENERAL
SUMMARY
A. The Work of this Section includes Factory Mutual (FM) listed insulated
translucent sandwich panel system and accessories, factory unitized, as shown
and specified. Work includes furnishing and installing:
1. Flat factory prefabricated structural insulated translucent sandwich panels.
2. Aluminum installation system.
3. Aluminum sill flashing.
1.02
RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Carefully examine all of the Contract Documents for requirements which affect
the work of this section.
B. Other specifications sections which directly relate to the work of this section
include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Section 05120 - Structural Metal Framing; steel tubes, attachment to
framing.
2. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications; lintels and supporting structure not
shown on structural drawings.
3. Section 07426 - Fabricated Wall Panel System
4. Section 07620 – Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.
5. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer’s product data. Include construction details, material
descriptions, profiles and finishes of components.
B. Submit shop drawings. Include elevations, details, dimensions and attachments
to other work.
C. Submit manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors available for
TRANSLUCENT PANEL WALL UNIT SYSTEM
08450 - 1
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
factory finished aluminum.
1. Submit samples for each exposed finish required, in same thickness and
material indicated for the work and in size indicated below. If finishes
involve normal color variations, include sample sets consisting of two or
more units showing the full range of variations expected.
a. Sandwich panels: 14” x 28” units
b. Factory finished aluminum: 5” long sections
D. Submit Installer Certificate, signed by installer, certifying compliance with
project qualification requirements.
E. Submit product test reports from a qualified independent testing agency
indicating each type and class of panel system complies with the project
performance requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current
products. Previously completed test reports will be acceptable if for current
manufacturer and indicative of products used on this project.
1. Test reports required are:
a. Flame Spread and Smoke Developed (UL 723) – Submit UL Card
b. Burn Extent (ASTM D-635)
c. Color Difference (ASTM D-2244)
d. Abrasion/Erosion Resistance (ASTM D-4060)
e. Impact Strength (UL 972)
f.
Bond Tensile Strength (ASTM C-297 after aging by ASTM D-1037
g. Bond Shear Strength (ASTM D-1002)
h. Beam Bending Strength (ASTM E-72)
i.
Insulation U-Factor (NFRC-100)
j.
NFRC System Certification
k. Condensation Resistance Factor (AAMA 1503)
l.
Factory Mutual (FM) 4881.
F. Submit current documentation indicating regular, independent quality control
monitoring under a nationally recognized building code review and listing
program.
TRANSLUCENT PANEL WALL UNIT SYSTEM
08450 - 2
July 28, 2016
1.04
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications:
1. Material and products shall be manufactured by a company continuously
and regularly employed in the manufacture of specified materials. At least
three (3) of the projects shall have been in successful use for ten (10) years
or longer.
2. Panel system must be listed by the International Code Council – Evaluation
Service (ICC-ES) which requires quality control inspections and fire,
structural and water infiltration testing of sandwich panel systems by an
approved agency.
3. Quality control inspections and required testing shall be conducted at least
once each year and shall include manufacturing facilities, sandwich panel
components and production sandwich panels for conformance with
“Acceptance Criteria for Sandwich Panels” as regulated by the ICC-ES.
B. Installer’s Qualifications: Installation shall be by an experienced installer, which
has been in the business of installing specified panel systems and can show
evidence of satisfactory completion of projects of similar size, scope and type.
1.05
Performance Requirements: The manufacturer shall be responsible for the
configuration and fabrication of the complete panel system.
1. When requested, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by a
licensed professional engineer registered in the Commonwealth of
Pennsylvania, responsible for their preparation.
2. Standard panel system shall have less than 0.01 cfm/ft² air leakage by
ASTM E 283 at 6.24 PSF
(50 mph) and no water penetration by ASTM E
331 at 15 PSF; and structural testing by ASTM E 330.
3. Provide system capable of handling the structural loads indicated on the
drawings.
1.06
DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver panel system, components and materials in manufacturer's standard
protective packaging.
B. Store panels on the long edge, several inches above the ground, blocked and
under cover in accordance with manufacturer's storage and handling
instructions.
TRANSLUCENT PANEL WALL UNIT SYSTEM
08450 - 3
July 28, 2016
1.07
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
WARRANTY
A. Submit manufacturer's and installer's written warranty agreeing to repair or
replace panel system work, which fails in materials or workmanship within one
year of the date of delivery. Failure of materials or workmanship shall include
leakage, excessive deflection, deterioration of finish on metal in excess of
normal weathering, defects in accessories, insulated translucent sandwich
panels and other components of the work.
B. Extended Warranty: 5 year Material and workmanship guarantee staring at
time of delivery. 10 year pro-rata limited warranty starting at time of delivery
covering separation of faces from grid core and/or abnormal color change of
exterior face sheet.
PART 2
2.01
PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURER
A. Drawings and Specifications are based on prefabricated insulated wall panel
system as manufactured by Kalwall Corporation or approved equal.
Comparable products will be considered provided they comply with indicated
performance requirements and meet profile, sticking, and glazing
characteristics indicated on drawings.
2.02
PANEL COMPONENTS
A. Face Sheets
1. Translucent faces: Manufactured from glass fiber reinforced thermoset resins,
formulated specifically for architectural use.
a. Thermoplastic (e.g. polycarbonate, acrylic) faces are not acceptable.
b. Face sheets shall not deform, deflect or drip when subjected to fire or
flame.
2. Interior face sheets:
a. Flame spread: Underwriters Laboratories (UL) listed, which requires
periodic unannounced retesting, with flame spread rating no greater than
50 10 and smoke developed no greater than 250 when tested in
accordance with UL 723.
b. Burn extent by ASTM D 635 shall be no greater than 1”.
3. Exterior face sheets:
TRANSLUCENT PANEL WALL UNIT SYSTEM
08450 - 4
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
a. Color stability: Full thickness of the exterior face sheet shall not change
color more than 3 CIE Units DELTA E by ASTM D 2244 after 5 years
outdoor South Florida weathering at 5° facing south, determined by the
average of at least three white samples with and without a protective film
or coating to ensure long-term color stability. Color stability shall be
unaffected by abrasion or scratching.
b. Strength: Exterior face sheet shall be uniform in strength, impenetrable by
hand held pencil and repel an impact minimum of 70 ft. lbs. without
fracture or tear when impacted by a 3-1/4” diameter, 5 lb. free-falling ball
per UL 972.
4. Appearance:
a. Exterior face sheets: Smooth .070” thick and crystal in color.
b. Interior face sheets: Smooth .045052” thick and white in color.
c. Face sheets shall not vary more than ± 10% in thickness and be uniform
in color.
B. Grid Core:
1. Thermally broken I-beam grid core shall be of 6063-T6 or 6005-T5 alloy and
temper with provisions for mechanical interlocking of muntin-mullion and
perimeter. Width of I-beam shall be no less than 7/16”.
2. I-beam Thermal break: Minimum 1”, thermoset fiberglass composite.
C. Laminate Adhesive:
1. Heat and pressure resin type adhesive engineered for structural sandwich
panel use, with minimum 25-years field use. Adhesive shall pass testing
requirements specified by the International Code Council “Acceptance Criteria
for Sandwich Panel Adhesives”.”
2. Minimum tensile strength of 750 PSI when the panel assembly is tested by
ASTM C 297 after two exposures to six cycles each of the aging conditions
prescribed by ASTM D 1037.
3. Minimum shear strength of the panel adhesive by ASTM D 1002 after
exposure to four separate conditions:
a. 50% Relative Humidity at 68° F: 540 PSI
b. 182° F: 100 PSI
c. Accelerated Aging by ASTM D 1037 at room temperature: 800 PSI
d. Accelerated Aging by ASTM D 1037 at 182° F: 250 PSI
TRANSLUCENT PANEL WALL UNIT SYSTEM
08450 - 5
July 28, 2016
2.03
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
PANEL CONSTRUCTION
A. Provide sandwich panels of flat fiberglass reinforced translucent face sheets
laminated to a grid core of mechanically interlocking I-beams. The adhesive
bonding line shall be straight, cover the entire width of the I-beam and have a
neat, sharp edge.
1. Thickness: 2-3/4”
2. Light transmission: 20 %
3. Solar heat gain coefficient 0.25.
4. Panel U-factor by NFRC certified laboratory: 2-3/4” thermally broken grid
.23U.
5. Complete insulated panel system shall have NFRC certified U-factor of 0.28.
6. Grid pattern: Nominal size 1210”x20”; pattern Shoji.
B. Standard panels shall deflect no more than 1.9” at 30 PSF in 10’ 0” span without
a supporting frame by ASTM E 72.
C. Standard panels shall withstand 1200° F fire for minimum one hour without
collapse or exterior flaming.
D. Thermally broken panels: Minimum Condensation Resistance Factor of 80 by
AAMA 1503 measured on
the bond line.
E. Panels shall be Factory Mutual (FM) Listed 4881.
2.04
BATTENS AND PERIMETER CLOSURE SYSTEM
A. Closure system: Thermally broken extruded aluminum 6063-T6 and 6063-T5
alloy and temper clamp-tite screw type closure system.
B. Sealing tape: Manufacturer's standard, pre-applied to closure system at the
factory under controlled conditions.
C. Fasteners: 300 series stainless steel screws for aluminum closures, excluding
final fasteners to the building.
D. Finish:
1. Manufacturer's factory applied finish, which meets the performance
requirements of AAMA 2604. Color to be selected from manufacturer's
standards.
TRANSLUCENT PANEL WALL UNIT SYSTEM
08450 - 6
July 28, 2016
PART 3
3.01
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, supporting structure and installation conditions. Do not
proceed with panel erection until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.02
PREPARATION
A. Metal Protection:
1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic
action by painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or
tape recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.
2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against
corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint or method
recommended by manufacturer.
3. Where aluminum will contact pressure-treated wood, separate dissimilar
materials by methods recommended by manufacturer.
3.03
INSTALLATION
A. Install the panel system in accordance with the manufacturer's installation
recommendations and approved shop drawings.
1. Anchor component parts securely in place by permanent mechanical
attachment system.
2. Accommodate thermal and mechanical movements.
3. Set perimeter framing in a full bed of sealant compound, or with joint fillers
or gaskets to provide weather-tight construction.
B. Install joint sealants at perimeter joints and within the panel system in
accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.
3.04
CLEANING
A. Clean the panel system inside and outside, immediately after installation,
according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
END OF SECTION
TRANSLUCENT PANEL WALL UNIT SYSTEM
08450 - 7
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
THIS PAGE NOT USED
TRANSLUCENT PANEL WALL UNIT SYSTEM
08450 - 8
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
SECTION 09651 - RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
PART 1
1.01
GENERAL
SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Solid vinyl floor tile.
1.02
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: For each type of floor tile. Include floor tile layouts, edges,
columns, doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and
cutouts.
1. Show details of special patterns.
C. Samples: Full-size units of each color and pattern of floor tile required.
1. For heat-welding bead, manufacturer's standard-size Samples, but not
less than 9 inches long, of each color required.
D. Welded-Seam Samples: For seamless-installation technique indicated and for
each flooring product, color, and pattern required; with seam running
lengthwise and in center of 6-by-9-inch. Sample applied to a rigid backing and
prepared by Installer for this Project.
E.D. Product Schedule: For floor tile. Use same designations indicated on
Drawings.
F.E.
Qualification Data: For Installer.
G.F. Maintenance Data: For each type of floor tile to include in maintenance
manuals.
1.03
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
09651 - 1
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
1. Floor Tile: Furnish one box for every 50 boxes or fraction thereof, of each
type, color, and pattern of floor tile installed.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this
Project who are competent in techniques required by manufacturer for floor
tile installation and seaming method indicated.
1. Engage an installer who employs workers for this Project who are trained
or certified by floor tile manufacturer for installation techniques required.
B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals
and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials
and execution.
1. Build mockups for floor tile including resilient base and accessories.
a. Size: Minimum 100 sq. ft. for each type, color, and pattern in locations
directed by Architect.
2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the
Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically
approves such deviations in writing.
3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become
part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial
Completion.
1.05
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store floor tile and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the
weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended
by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F. Store
floor tiles on flat surfaces.
1.06
FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer,
but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive floor
tile during the following time periods:
1. 48 hours before installation.
2. During installation.
3. 48 hours after installation.
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
09651 - 2
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
B. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient
temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than
55 deg F or more than 95 deg F.
C. Close spaces to traffic during floor tile installation.
D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor tile installation.
E. Install floor tile after other finishing operations, including painting, have been
completed.
PART 2
2.01
PRODUCTS
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For resilient tile flooring, as determined
by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a
qualified testing agency.
1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.
2.02
SOLID VINYL FLOOR TILE
A. Tile Standard: ASTM F 1700.
1. Class: Class I, vinyl tile
2. Type: A, smooth surface.
B. Thickness: match existing.
C. Size: match existing.
D. Colors and Patterns: Match Existing
2.03
INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland
cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or
approved by floor tile manufacturer for applications indicated.
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by floor tile and adhesive
manufacturers to suit floor tile and substrate conditions indicated.
C. Color: Match floor tile.
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
09651 - 3
July 28, 2016
PART 3
3.01
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements
for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of
the Work.
1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other
requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of
cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might
interfere with adhesion of floor tile.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.02
PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates according to floor tile manufacturer's written instructions to
ensure adhesion of resilient products.
B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.
1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and
hardeners.
2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible
with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using
mechanical methods recommended by floor tile manufacturer. Do not use
solvents.
3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by floor tile
manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrate alkalinity falls
within range on pH scale recommended by manufacturer in writing, but not
less than 5 or more than 9 pH.
4. Moisture Testing: Proceed with installation only after substrates pass
testing according to floor tile manufacturer's written recommendations, but
not less stringent than the following:
a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test according to ASTM F 1869.
Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum
moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours.
b. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes according to
ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a
maximum 75 percent relative humidity level.
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
09651 - 4
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and
patching compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and
smooth substrate.
D. Do not install floor tiles until they are the same temperature as the space
where they are to be installed.
1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient floor tile and
installation materials into spaces where they will be installed.
E. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be
covered by resilient floor tile.
3.03
FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile.
B. Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls,
discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal
width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than onehalf tile at perimeter.
1. Lay tiles in pattern indicatedto match existing.
C. Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the
same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard
broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles.
1. Lay tiles in pattern of colors and sizes indicatedto match existing.
D. Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and
permanent fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and
door frames.
E. Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings.
Extend floor tiles to center of door openings.
F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked
for future cutting by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use
chalk or other nonpermanent marking device.
G. Adhere floor tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied
to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids,
raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and
other surface imperfections.
H. Seamless Installation:
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
09651 - 5
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
1. Heat-Welded Seams: Comply with ASTM F 1516. Rout joints and heat
weld with welding bead to permanently fuse sections into a seamless
flooring. Prepare, weld, and finish seams to produce surfaces flush with
adjoining flooring surfaces.
3.04
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting
floor tile.
B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor tile
installation:
1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces.
2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly.
3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.
C. Protect floor tile from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from
construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during
remainder of construction period.
D. Cover floor tile until Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
09651 - 6
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
SECTION 09900 - PAINTS AND COATINGS
PART 1
1.01
GENERAL
DESCRIPTION
A. Provide painting, as shown and scheduled per Contract Drawings; including,
but not limited to:
1. Painting and surface preparation for interior and exterior finished surfaces
2. Priming of substrates.
3. Refer to Section 09902 for painting of hot dip galvanized and painted
steel.
4. Refer to Section 09960 for high performance coatings on concrete floor.
1.02
RELATED WORK
A. Section 03300 – Cast-In-Place Concrete
B. Section 04200 – Masonry Unit
C. Section 05120 – Structural Steel
D. Section 05310 – Steel Deck
E. Section 05400 – Cold Formed Metal Framing
F. Section 05500 – Metal Fabrications
G. Section 08410 – Aluminum Framed Entrances and Storefronts
H. Section 09260 – Gypsum Board Assemblies
I. Section 09653 – Resilient Base and Accessories
J. Section 15037 – Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems
K. Section 15038 – Fire Suppression Standpipes
L. Section 15195 – Facility Natural-Gas Piping
1.03
REFERENCES
PAINTS AND COATINGS
09900 - 1
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
A. American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM): Conform to ASTM D16 for
interpretation of terms used in this Section.
B. National Paint and Coatings Association (NPCA): Guide to U.S. Government
Paint Specifications.
C. Painting and Decorating Contractors of America (PDCA): Painting Architectural Specifications Manual.
D. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC): Steel Structures Painting Manual.
E. ANSI A13.1: Scheme for Identification of Piping System
D.F.
1.04
OSHA safety color regulation
SUBMITTALS
A. Samples:
1. General: Submit specified colors for each surface-finishing product.
2. Field Samples:
a. General: In place, on material scheduled to be finished, illustrating
coating color, texture and finish. Locate where directed; accepted
sample may remain as part of the Work.
b. Size: One (1) entire unit as scheduled to be finished
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications, data, and installation
instructions for review.
C. Product List: Cross-reference to coating system and locations of application
areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.
Include color designations.
D. Certificates: Submit statement of VOC compliance with local regulations.
1.05
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and
finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals
and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials
and execution.
1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for
application of each paint system.
PAINTS AND COATINGS
09900 - 2
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq.
ft.
b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.
2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups.
a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional
mockups of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to
Owner.
3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the
Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically
approves such deviations in writing.
4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become
part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial
Completion.
B. General: Refer to Section 01400 – Quality Requirements.
C. Qualifications:
1. Applicator: Specializing in performing the work of this Section with
documented experience.
D. Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC): Use only products in compliance with
VOC content limits required by state and local regulations.
1.06
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Delivery:
1. Schedule delivery of materials at the site at such time as required for
proper coordination of the work. Receive materials in manufacturer’s
unopened packages and bearing manufacturer’s label.
B. Storage:
1. General: Store materials in a dry and properly ventilated separate
structure not less than 50'-0" from any other structure on the site.
Adequately protect from damage and exposure to the elements.
2. Temperature: Maintain minimum of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90
degrees F.
3. Fire Prevention: Take necessary precautions to prevent fire; remove
paint-soiled rags and waste from building each day or store in metal
PAINTS AND COATINGS
09900 - 3
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
containers with covers in the paint storage structure.
1.07
WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer’s Standard Warranty:
1. General: Provide, in required form, for a period of five (5) years from date
of final acceptance.
2. Criteria: Color and finish appearance shall remain unchanged throughout
entire guarantee period.
1.08
EXTRA MATERIAL
A. Deliver one percent (1%) or a minimum of two (2) gallons of each color, type,
and surface texture of paint installed. Label each container with color, type,
texture, and room locations.
PART 2
2.01
PRODUCTS
MATERIALS
A. Manufacturer:
1. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Basis of Design: Sherwin Williams
b. Carboline Co.
c. Benjamin Moore
d. Or approved equal.
2. Container Label: Identify with manufacturer's name, and include
description of type of paint, brand name, lot number, and brand code and
color designation.
B. General: Provide ready mixed products, except field catalyzed coatings.
Provide accessory materials such as linseed oil, shellac, thinners, cleaners,
and other materials not specifically indicated but required to achieve finishes
specified.
1. Use only one lot of paint for any individual element to be painted. Do not
mix lots of paint.
PAINTS AND COATINGS
09900 - 4
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
C. Exterior
1. Hot dip galvanized steel: Refer to Section Hot Dip Galvanized and Painted
Steel Section 09902
2. Composite Trim:
a. (1) coat Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Universal Gray Primer B66-310
b. (2) coats Pro Industrial HP Acrylic, Semi-Gloss B66-650
3. Miscellaneous Metal trim:
a. (1) coat Macropoxy 646-100 Fast Cure Epoxy, B58-620
b. (2) coats High Solids 100 Polyurethane B65-600
4. Ferrous Metal and Various Slightly Rusted Substrates – Interior or
Exterior, including but not limited to exposed piping/conduit, ladders,
safety cages, platforms, gratings, and support brackets.
a. (1) coat Kem Bond HS Universal Metal Primer B50AZ8
b. (2) coats Industrial Enamel High Solids Gloss B54 series
Or
c. (1) coat Macropoxy 646-100, Fast Cure Epoxy B58-620
d. (2) coats High Solids Polyurethane 100 B65-600
5. Walls
a. Standard CMU or Concrete Block. Ground face block shall not be
painted.
1) (1) coat PrepRite Block Filler B25W25
2) (2) coats A-100 Exterior Latex Satin A82 Series
b. Concrete Walls or Curbs
1) (1) coat Loxon Concrete & Masonry Primer, A24
2) (2) coats A-100 Exterior Latex Satin A82 Series
6. Pest Control Bird Slide
a. (1) coat PrepRite ProBlock Interior/Exterior Latex Primer/Sealer B51PAINTS AND COATINGS
09900 - 5
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
600
b. (2) coats Pro Industrial Acrylic B66-650 or B66-660; final sheen to be
selected by architect depending on location of slide.
c. Adhesion test is required.
D. Galvanized Metal Note:
1. Refer to Hot Dip Galvanized and Painted Steel Section 09902
E. Interior
1. Walls
a. Standard CMU or Concrete Block. Ground face block shall not be
painted.
1) (1) coat PrepRite Block Filler B25W25
2) (2) coats ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Semi Gloss B31W200
b. Concrete Walls or Curbs
1) (1) coat Loxon Concrete & Masonry Primer, A24
2) (2) coats ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Semi Gloss B31W200
c. Concrete Walls and CMU block within Wash Bay
1) (1) coat Heavy Duty Block Filler B42W46
2) (2) coats Pro Industrial Water Based Epoxy, glossy B73W311
2. Stair Trim and Interior Structural Steel
a. (1) coat Kem Bond Primer B50 Series
b. (2) coats ProIndustrial WB Alkyd Urethane enamel, semi-gloss, B531150
3. Gypsum Board
a. (1) coat ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Primer, B28W2600
b. (2) coats ProMar 200 Zero VOC B-20 Series. Sheen to match existing
4. Fire Rated Plywood
a. (1) coat ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Primer, B28W2600
PAINTS AND COATINGS
09900 - 6
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
b. (2) coats Pro Industrial Acrylic, B66-650
5. Interior Concrete Slab Safety Yellow Striping
a. (1) Coat Corothane B65Y50 with 20% reducer 15 R7K15
b. (1) Coat Corothane B65Y50
F. Miscellaneous Cleaning And Refinishing Materials:
1. Fine grade Scotch-Brite pads (white and/or green type, manufactured by
3M Co, St Paul MN, or approved equal.
2. Very fine steel wool, clean and free of contaminants and corrosion.
3. Clean, soft, lintless, cotton rags.
4. Cotton pads and swabs.
G. Solvent Cleaners And Thinners:
1. Xylene: Commercial manufacture.
2. White Spirit: Commercial manufacture.
3. Odorless Lacquer Thinner: Commercial manufacture.
4. Denatured Alcohol: Commercial manufacture.
5. Or approved equal.
2.02
MIXING
A. General: Mix paints at the factory; do not alter or reduce materials except as
directed by manufacturer.
B. Colors: See finish schedule on drawings.
C. Mildew Resistance: Add fungicidal agent to paint per manufacturer's
recommendations. Add agent at the factory; clearly indicate on label that
paint is mildew resistant.
PART 3
3.01
EXECUTION
PREPARATION
A. Environmental Requirements:
PAINTS AND COATINGS
09900 - 7
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
1. General: Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when
relative humidity is outside the humidity ranges required by the
manufacturer.
2. Temperature:
a. General:
Do not apply materials when surface and ambient
temperatures are outside the temperature ranges required by the
manufacturer.
b. Exterior Paints: 40 degrees F minimum during and for 48 hours after
application; do not apply when temperature is over 90 degrees F,
except in protected or shaded areas.
c. Interior Paints: 50 degrees F for minimum of 48 hours before, during,
and for 48 hours after application.
3. Ventilation: Provide adequate ventilation of all interior spaces during
application and curing of all painting products.
4. Lighting Level: Provide minimum 80 foot candles measured at mid-height
of room. At exterior, measured at mid height of element to be painted.
B. Examination:
1. General: Examine conditions of surfaces in place before beginning work;
report defects.
2. Shop Applied Primer:
materials
Test for compatibility with subsequent cover
3. Moisture Content: Measure moisture content of surfaces using an
electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes unless moisture content
of surfaces is below the following maximums:
4. Acceptance: Application of first coat of painting process constitutes
acceptance of surface
C. Protection: Protect adjacent surfaces not scheduled for paint finish from
damage resulting from painting operations.
D. Steel/Metals Surface Preparation:
1. Blast cleaning of faying surfaces shall be performed in accordance with
SSPC-SP10, Near-white Blast Cleaning.
2. Blast cleaning all other steel shall be performed in accordance with SSPCSP6, Commercial Blast Cleaning.
PAINTS AND COATINGS
09900 - 8
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
3. Oil, grease, salts, or other surface contaminations must first be removed
by the methods outlined in SSPC SP 1.
4. Dust conditions at the station site shall be anticipated, and such dust as
may collect shall be removed before touch-up paint is applied.
5. All flux, spatter, slag, or laminations from welding or other sharp
projections shall be ground smooth prior to blast cleaning.
6. All areas blast cleaned on any day shall be coated on the same day. Any
such areas not coated that are exposed overnight shall be lightly “whipblasted” to remove any visible or invisible rust that may have formed.
7. Remove or mask electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim,
escutcheons, and fittings prior to preparing surfaces or finishing. Correct
defects and clean surfaces that affect work of this section. Remove
existing coatings that exhibit loose surface conditions. Use Shellac to seal
marks, which may bleed through surface finishes.
8. Impervious Surfaces: Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of
trisodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow
surface to dry.
9. Shop Primed Steel Surfaces: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer
and rust. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean
surfaces with solvent to remove all oil, grease and other foreign matter.
Prime bare steel surfaces.
3.02
APPLICATION
A. General: Install in conformance with referenced standards, manufacturer's
written directions, as shown, and as specified.
B. Performance:
1. General: Apply each coat to uniform finish, slightly darker than preceding
coat unless otherwise approved. Sand surfaces lightly between coats to
achieve required finish. Vacuum clean surfaces free of loose particles;
use tack cloth just prior to applying next coat. Allow applied coat to dry
before next coat is applied.
3.03
CLEANING
A. General: Upon completion, remove masking materials, reinstall electrical
cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed
prior to finishing, and thoroughly clean all exposed surfaces per
PAINTS AND COATINGS
09900 - 9
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
manufacturer's instructions. Keep premises free from accumulation of waste
and rubbish. At the completion of work remove surplus materials, rubbish,
and debris.
B. Touch-Up: After detailed inspection of paint work, touch up or refinish
abraded, stained, or otherwise disfigured work, as required by the Engineer.
C. Cleaning: Remove containers, rags, and debris from the site; observe special
care in control or disposal of flammable materials.
END OF SECTION
PAINTS AND COATINGS
09900 - 10
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
SECTION 13120 - STEEL BUILDING SYSTEMS
PART 1
1.01
GENERAL
DESCRIPTION
A. This Section includes metal building systems that consist of integrated sets of
mutually dependent components including structural framing, wall panels,
doors and accessories.
1.02
RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 042200 – CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
B. Section 07620 – SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
C. Section 08331 – OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
D. Section 09900 – PAINTS AND COATINGS
1.03
DEFINITIONS
A. Terminology Standard: Refer to MBMA’s “Metal Building Systems Manual” for
definitions of terms for metal building system construction not otherwise defined
in this Section or in referenced standards.
1.04
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. General: Provide a complete, integrated set of metal building system
manufacturer's standard mutually dependent components and assemblies that
form a metal building system capable of withstanding structural and other
loads, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure or
infiltration of water into building interior. Include primary and secondary framing,
and metal wall panels, and accessories complying with requirements indicated.
1. Provide metal building system of size and with spacings, slopes, and spans
indicated.
B. Primary Frame Type:
1. Rigid Modular: Solid-member, structural-framing system without interior
columns.
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
13120 - 1
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
C. End-Wall Framing: Manufacturer's standard, for buildings not required to be
expandable, consisting of primary frame, capable of supporting one-half of a
bay design load, and end-wall columns.
D. Secondary Frame Type: Manufacturer's standard purlins and joists and
exterior-framed (bypass) girts.
E. Bay Spacing: See drawings.
F. Roof System: See section 07413 – Standing Seam Metal Roof Panels.
G. Exterior Wall System: Concealed fastener, lap seam metal wall panels.
Manufacturer's standard field-assembled, insulated metal wall panelsSee
section 2.03.
1.05
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Provide metal building systems capable of
withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses
within limits and under conditions indicated:
1. Engineer metal building systems according to procedures in MBMA's "Metal
Building Systems Manual."
2. Design Loads: As indicated on Contract Drawings.
3. Design Loads: As required by ASCE 7, IBC 2009, FM Global.
4. Live Loads: Include vertical loads induced by the building occupancy
indicated on Contract Drawings. Include loads induced by maintenance
workers, materials, and equipment for roof live loads.
a. Building Occupancy: As indicated on Contract Drawings.
5. Roof Snow Loads: Include vertical loads induced by the weight of snow, as
indicated on Contract drawings and FM Global criteria. Allow for
unbalanced and drift loads.
6. Wind Loads: Include horizontal loads induced by a basic wind speed as
indicated on Contract Drawings and FM Global criteria.
7. Collateral Loads: Include additional dead loads other than the weight of
metal building system for permanent items such as sprinklers, mechanical
systems, electrical systems, and ceilings.
8. Auxiliary Loads: Include dynamic live loads, such as those generated by
cranes and materials-handling equipment as indicated on Contract
Drawings.
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
13120 - 2
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
9. Load Combinations: Design metal building systems to withstand the most
critical effects of load factors and load combinations as required by MBMA's
"Metal Building Systems Manual.", and ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads
for Buildings and Other Structures".
10. Deflection Limits: Engineer assemblies to withstand design loads with
deflections no greater than the following:
a. Purlins and Rafters: Vertical deflection of L/240.
b. Girts: Horizontal deflection of L/240.
c. Metal Wall Panels: Horizontal deflection of L/240.
11. Lateral Drift: Primary Framing
a. L/240 or 1.25” maximum for total building drift located at the building
eave height
12. Design secondary framing system to accommodate deflection of primary
building structure and construction tolerances, and to maintain clearances
at openings.
13. Provide metal panel assemblies capable of withstanding the effects of loads
and stresses indicated, based on testing according to ASTM E 1592.
B. Seismic Performance: Design and engineer metal building systems capable of
withstanding the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE
7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures: Earthquake
Loads." Chapters 11 through 14.
C. Thermal Movements: Provide metal panel systems that allow for thermal
movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient
and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints,
overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections,
and other detrimental effects.
Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both
solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; material surfaces.
D. Air Infiltration for Metal Roof Panels: Air leakage through assembly of not more
than 0.3 L/s per sq. m of roof area when tested according to ASTM E 1680 at
negative test-pressure difference of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft.
E. Air Infiltration for Metal Wall Panels: Air leakage through assembly of not more
than 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. of wall area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
13120 - 3
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
static-air-pressure difference of 6.24 lbf/sq. ft.
F. Water Penetration for Metal Roof Panels: No water penetration when tested
according to ASTM E 1646 at test-pressure difference of 2.86 lbf/sq. ft.
G. Water Penetration for Metal Wall Panels: No water penetration when tested
according to ASTM E 331 at a minimum differential pressure of 20 percent of
inward-acting, wind-load design pressure of not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. and
not more than 12 lbf/sq. ft.
H. Wind-Uplift Resistance: Provide metal roof panel assemblies that comply with
UL 580 for Class 30.
1.06
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions
of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of the
following metal building system components:
1. Structural-framing system.
2. Metal wall panels.
3. Flashing and trim.
4. Doors.
5. Accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: For the following metal building system components. Include
plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include
structural analysis data signed and sealed by a registered professional
engineer in the State of Pennsylvania.
2. Anchor-Bolt Plans: Submit anchor-bolt plans before foundation work
begins. Include location, diameter, and projection of anchor bolts required
to attach metal building to foundation. Indicate column reactions at each
location.
3. Structural-Framing Drawings: Show complete fabrication of primary and
secondary framing; include provisions for openings. Indicate welds and
bolted connections, distinguishing between shop and field applications.
Include transverse cross-sections.
4. Metal Wall Panel Layout Drawings: Show layouts of metal panels including
methods of support. Include details of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles,
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
13120 - 4
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
corners, anchorages, trim, flashings, closures, and special details.
Distinguish between factory- and field-assembled work; show locations of
exposed fasteners.
a. Show wall-mounted items including doors, louvers, and lighting fixtures.
5. Accessory Drawings: Include details of the following items, at a scale of not
less than 1-1/2” per 12”.
a. Flashing and trim.
b. Gutters.
c. Downspouts.
d. Louvers.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of building component with factoryapplied color finish.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared
Samples of sizes indicated below.
1. Wall Panels: Nominal 12” long by actual panel width. Include fasteners,
closures, and other exposed panel accessories.
2. Flashing and Trim: Nominal 12” long. Include fasteners and other exposed
accessories.
E. Product Certificates: For each type of metal building system, signed by product
manufacturer.
1. Letter of Design Certification: Signed and sealed by a registered
professional engineer in the State of Pennsylvania. Include the following:
a. Name and location of Project.
b. Order number.
c. Name of manufacturer.
d. Name of Contractor.
e. Building dimensions including width, length, height, and roof slope.
f. Indicate compliance with AISC standards for hot-rolled steel and AISI
standards for cold-rolled steel, including edition dates of each standard.
g. Governing building code and year of edition.
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
13120 - 5
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
h. Design Loads: Include dead load, roof live load, collateral loads, roof
snow load, deflection, wind loads/speeds and exposure, seismic design
category or effective peak velocity-related acceleration/peak
acceleration, and auxiliary loads.
i.
Load Combinations: Indicate that loads were applied acting
simultaneously with concentrated loads, according to governing building
code.
j.
Building-Use Category: Indicate category of building use and its effect
on load importance factors.
k. AISC Certification for Category MB: Include statement that metal
building system and components were designed and produced in an
AISC-Certified Facility by an AISC-Certified Manufacturer.
F. Welding certificates.
G. Erector Certificate: Signed by manufacturer certifying that erector complies with
requirements.
H. Manufacturer Certificate: Signed by manufacturer certifying that products
comply with requirements.
I. Qualification Data: For Erector, manufacturer professional engineer, land
surveyor, and testing agency.
J. Material Test Reports: Signed by manufacturers certifying that the following
products comply with requirements:
1. Structural steel including chemical and physical properties.
2. Bolts, nuts, and washers including mechanical properties and chemical
analysis.
3. Tension-control, high-strength, bolt-nut-washer assemblies.
4. Shop primers.
5. Nonshrink grout.
K. Source quality-control test reports.
L. Field quality-control test reports.
M. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed
by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for insulation and
vapor retarders. Include reports for thermal resistance, fire-test-response
characteristics, water-vapor transmission, and water absorption.
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
13120 - 6
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
N. Surveys: Show final elevations and locations of major members. Indicate
discrepancies between actual installation and the Contract Drawings and
Specifications. Have surveyor who performed surveys certify their accuracy.
O. Other Action Submittals:
1. Door Schedule: For doors and frames. Use same designations indicated on
Contract Drawings. Include details of reinforcement.
a. Door Hardware Schedule: See section 08710.
1.07
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Erector Qualifications: An experienced erector who has specialized in erecting
and installing work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for
this Project and who is acceptable to manufacturer.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer.
1. AISC Certification for Category MB: An AISC-Certified Manufacturer that
designs and produces metal building systems and components in an AISCCertified Facility.
2. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings and
comprehensive engineering analysis by a registered professional engineer
in the State of Pennsylvania
C. Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally
qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is
experienced in providing surveying services of the kind indicated.
D. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to
ASTM E 329 for testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.
E. Source Limitations: Obtain primary metal building system components,
including structural framing and metal panel assemblies, through one (1)
source from a single manufacturer.
F. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional
requirements of metal building system and are based on the specific system
indicated.
1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect,
except with Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit
comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review.
G. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
13120 - 7
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
Welding Code--Steel," and AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."
H. Structural Steel: Comply with AISC's "Specification for Structural Steel
Buildings for design requirements and allowable stresses.
I. Cold-Formed Steel: Comply with AISI's "Specification for the Design of ColdFormed Steel Structural Members," or AISI's "Load and Resistance Factor
Design Specification for Steel Structural Members," for design requirements
and allowable stresses.
J. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide metal panel assemblies
identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136.
2. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire
Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another testing and inspecting
agency.
3. Metal panels shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable
testing and inspecting agency.
K. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide field-insulated metal panels having
thermal insulation and vapor-retarder-facing materials with the following
surface-burning characteristics as determined by testing identical products per
ASTM E 84 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction:
1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less, unless otherwise indicated.
L. Pre-Erection Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Review methods
and procedures related to metal building systems including, but not limited to,
the following:
1. Inspect and discuss condition of foundations and other preparatory work
performed by other trades.
2. Review structural load limitations.
3. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of
materials, Erector's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make
progress and avoid delays.
4. Review required testing, inspecting, and certifying procedures.
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
13120 - 8
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
5. Review weather and forecasted weather conditions and procedures for
unfavorable conditions.
M. Preinstallation Wall Assembly Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
Review methods and procedures related to metal wall panel assemblies
including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Examine support conditions for compliance with requirements, including
alignment between and attachment to structural members.
2. Review structural limitations of girts and columns during and after wall panel
installation.
3. Review flashings, special siding details, wall penetrations, openings, and
condition of other construction that will affect metal wall panels.
4. Review temporary protection requirements for metal wall panel assembly
during and after installation.
5. Review wall observation and repair procedures after metal wall panel
installation.
1.08
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver components, sheets, panels, and other manufactured items so as not
to be damaged or deformed. Package metal panels for protection during
transportation and handling.
B. Unload, store, and erect metal panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping,
twisting, and surface damage.
C. Stack metal panels horizontally on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable
weathertight and ventilated covering. Store metal panels to ensure dryness and
with positive slope for drainage of water. Do not store metal panels in contact
with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface
damage.
1.09
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when weather conditions
permit metal panels to be installed according to manufacturers’ written
instructions and warranty requirements.
B. Field Measurements:
1. Established Dimensions for Foundations: Comply with established
dimensions on approved anchor-bolt plans, establishing foundation
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
13120 - 9
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
dimensions and proceeding with fabricating structural framing without field
measurements. Coordinate anchor-bolt installation to ensure that actual
anchorage dimensions correspond to established dimensions.
2. Established Dimensions for Metal Panels: Where field measurements
cannot be made without delaying the Work, either establish framing and
opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating metal panels without field
measurements, or allow for field trimming metal panels. Coordinate
construction to ensure that actual building dimensions, locations of
structural members, and openings correspond to established dimensions.
1.10
COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete foundations and casting of anchorbolt inserts into foundation walls and footings.
B. Coordinate metal panel assemblies with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, and
construction of supports and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof,
secure, and noncorrosive installation.
1.11
WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty on Metal Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in
which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace metal panels that show
evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty
period.
1. Siliconized Polyester Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the
following:
a. Color fading more than 15 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM
D 2244.
b. Chalking in excess of a No. 2 rating when tested according to ASTM D
4214.
c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.
2. Fluoropolymer Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the
following:
a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM
D 2244.
b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D
4214.
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
13120 - 10
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.
PART 2
2.01
PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include.
B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the
named product or a comparable product by one of the following:
1. Alliance Steel, Inc.
2. American Buildings Company.
3. American Steel Building Company, Inc.; Division of NCI Building Systems,
LLP.
4. Behlen Mfg. Co.
5. Butler Manufacturing Company.
6. Ceco Building Systems; Division of Robertson-Ceco Corporation.
7. Crown Metal Buildings, Inc.
8. Garco Building Systems.
9. Gulf States Manufacturers, Inc.
10. Mesco Metal Buildings; Division of NCI Building Systems, LLP.
11. Metallic Metal Building Company; Division of NCI Building Systems, LLP.
12. Package Industries, Inc.
13. Southern Structures, Inc.
14. Spirco Manufacturing; Division of Metal Building Products, Inc.
15. Star Building Systems; Division of Robertson-Ceco Corporation.
16. Steelox Systems Inc.
17. United Structures of America, Inc.
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
13120 - 11
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
18. VP Buildings, Inc.; a United Dominion Company.
19. Approved Equal.
2.02
STRUCTURAL-FRAMING MATERIALS
A. W-Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M; ASTM A 572/A 572M, Grade 50 or 55 (345
or 380); or ASTM A 529/A 529M, Grade 50 or 55 (345 or 380).
B. Channels, Angles, M-Shapes, and S-Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M; ASTM A
572/A 572M, Grade 50 or 55 (345 or 380); or ASTM A 529/A 529M, Grade 50
or 55 (345 or 380).
C. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36/A 36M; ASTM A 572/A 572M, Grade 50 or 55 (345
or 380); or ASTM A 529/A 529M, Grade 50 or 55 (345 or 380).
D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or S, Grade B.
E. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 1085 structural tubing.
F. Structural-Steel Sheet: Hot-rolled, ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Structural Steel
(SS), Grades 30 through 55 (205 through 380), or High-Strength Low Alloy
Steel (HSLAS), Grades 45 through 70 (310 through 480); or cold-rolled, ASTM
A 1008/A 1008M, Structural Steel (SS), Grades 25 through 80 (170 through
550), or High-Strength Low Alloy Steel (HSLAS), Grades 45 through 70 (310
through 480).
G. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS),
Grades 33 through 80 (230 through 550) or High-Strength Low Alloy Steel
(HSLAS), Grades 50 through 80 (340 through 550); with G60 (Z180) coating
designation; mill phosphatized.
H. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet Prepainted with Coil Coating: Steel sheet metallic
coated by the hot-dip process and prepainted by the coil-coating process to
comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M.
1. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural
Steel (SS), Grades 33 through 80 (230 through 550) or High-Strength Low
Alloy Steel (HSLAS), Grades 50 through 80 (340 through 550); with G90
(Z275) coating designation.
2. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792/A 792M, Structural
Steel (SS), Grade 50 or 80 (340 or 550); with Class AZ50 (AZM150) coating.
I. Non-High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F
568M, Property Class 4.6), carbon-steel, hex-head bolts; ASTM A 563 (ASTM
A 563M) carbon-steel hex nuts; and ASTM F 844 plain (flat) steel washers.
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
13120 - 12
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
1. Finish: Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C or mechanically
deposited zinc coating, ASTM B 695, Class 50.
J. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type
1, heavy hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy hex
carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M) hardened carbon-steel
washers.
1. Finish: Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C or mechanically
deposited zinc coating, ASTM B 695, Class 50.
2. Tension-Control, High-Strength Bolt-Nut-Washer Assemblies: ASTM F
1852, Type 1, heavy-hex-head steel structural bolts with splined ends.
a. Finish: Mechanically deposited zinc coating, ASTM B 695, Class 50.
K. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 490 (ASTM A 490M), Type
1, heavy hex steel structural bolts or tension-control, bolt-nut-washer
assemblies with splined ends; ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy hex carbonsteel nuts; and ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M) hardened carbon-steel washers,
plain.
L. Unheaded Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36 or ASTM A 572/A 572M,
Grade 50.
1. Configuration: Straight.
2. Nuts: ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy hex carbon steel.
3. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel.
4. Washers: ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M) hardened carbon steel.
5. Finish: Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C or mechanically
deposited zinc coating, ASTM B 695, Class 50.
M. Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, Grade 50
1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy hex carbon steel.
2. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel.
3. Washers: ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M) hardened carbon steel.
4. Finish: Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C or mechanically
deposited zinc coating, ASTM B 695, Class 50.
N. Threaded Rods: ASTM A 193/A 193M ASTM A 572/A 572M, Grade 50.
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
13120 - 13
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy hex carbon steel.
2. Washers: ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M) hardened ASTM A 36/A 36M
carbon steel.
3. Finish: Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C or mechanically
deposited zinc coating, ASTM B 695, Class 50.
O. Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, Type I, red oxide.
2.03
CONCEALED-FASTENER, LAP-SEAM METAL WALL PANELS
A. Concealed-fastener, Lap seam Metal Wall Panels: Provide factory-formed
metal wall panels designed to be field assembled by lapping and
interconnecting side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching
through panel to supports using concealed fasteners in side laps. Include
accessories required for weathertight installation
B. Box-Rib-Profile, Concealed-Fastener Metal Wall Panels: Formed with raised,
1-1/2" box-shaped ribs that are symmetrical with recessed ribs, evenly spaced
across panel width, and with rib/recess sides angled at 90 degrees.
1. Basis-of Design Product: ATAS International, Inc.; Metafor™ - MFP120
a. Or Approved Equal.
3. Material: Aluminum - .040 thick
a. Texture: Smooth
b. Finish: KYNAR 5000® PDVF or HYLAR 5000® Finish
c. Color: Dove Grey (13)
4. Panel Coverage: 12"
5. Panel Height: 5/8"
6. Panel Application Orientation: Vertical.
2.04
METAL WALL PANEL FABRICATION
C. Panels:
1. Panels to be Factory fabricated in a controlled environment.
2. Panels to be tension leveled during roll forming process.
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
13120 - 14
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
3. Panels to be produced in longest lengths possible, except when modular
units are utilized.
D. Form all components true to shape, accurate in size, square and free from
distortion or defects. Cut panels to precise lengths indicated on approved shop
drawings or as required by field conditions.
E. Accessories: Factory fabricates trim and flashing components in standard 12foot lengths.
1. Form panel lines, breaks, and angles to be sharp and true, with surfaces
free from warp and buckle.
2. Fabricate wall panels as required to maintain fabrication tolerances and to
withstand design loads.
F. Fabricate metal wall panels in a manner that eliminates condensation on
interior side of panel and with joints between panels designed to form
weathertight seals.
G. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by
applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
H. Panels, fabrication and installation shall meet the requirements of the Metal
Construction Association Preformed Metal Wall Guidelines
2.05
DOOR AND FRAME MATERIALS
A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS),
Type B, suitable for exposed applications.
B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type
B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.
C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS),
Type B; with G60 (Z180) zinc (galvanized) or A60 (ZF180) zinc-iron-alloy
(galvannealed) coating designation.
2.06
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Fasteners: Self-tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self-locking rivets and bolts, endwelded studs, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads.
Provide fasteners with heads matching color of materials being fastened by
means of plastic caps or factory-applied coating.
1. Fasteners for Metal Roof Panels: Self-drilling or self-tapping, zinc-plated,
hex-head carbon-steel screws, with a stainless-steel cap or zinc-aluminum-
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
13120 - 15
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
alloy head and EPDM or neoprene sealing washer.
2. Fasteners for Metal Wall Panels: Self-drilling or self-tapping, zinc-plated,
hex-head carbon-steel screws, with nylon or polypropylene washer.
3. Fasteners for Metal Wall Panels: Self-drilling Type 410 stainless-steel or
self-tapping Type 304 stainless-steel or zinc-alloy-steel hex washer head,
with EPDM or PVC washer under heads of fasteners bearing on weather
side of metal panels.
4. Fasteners for Flashing and Trim: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws with
hex washer head.
5. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets.
B. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12,
compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type
noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other
deleterious impurities.
C. Backer Board: Hardboard complying with AHA A135.4, Class 1 tempered1/4"
thick, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Gypsum Board: Type X, of thicknesses indicated, complying with ASTM C
442/C 442M or ASTM C 36/C 36M.
E. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged,
nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to
consistency suitable for application and a thirty (30) minute working time.
F. Metal Panel Sealants:
1. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene
compound sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently
elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape of manufacturer’s standard size.
2. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; one-part elastomeric polyurethane, polysulfide,
or silicone-rubber sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications
required to seal joints in metal panels and remain weathertight; and as
recommended by metal building system manufacturer.
2.07
FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. General: Design components and field connections required for erection to
permit easy assembly.
1. Mark each piece and part of the assembly to correspond with previously
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
13120 - 16
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
prepared erection drawings, diagrams, and instruction manuals.
2. Fabricate structural framing to produce clean, smooth cuts and bends.
Punch holes of proper size, shape, and location. Members shall be free of
cracks, tears, and ruptures.
B. Tolerances: Comply with MBMA’s “Metal Building Systems Manual”: Chapter
IV, Section 9, “Fabrication and Erection Tolerances.”
C. Metal Panels: Fabricate and finish metal panels at the factory to greatest extent
possible, by manufacturer’s standard procedures and processes, as necessary
to fulfill indicated performance requirements. Comply with indicated profiles
and with dimensional and structural requirements.
1. Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if
any, for full length of metal panel.
2.08
STRUCTURAL FRAMING
A. General:
1. Structural Steel: Comply with AISC 360, “Specification for Structural Steel
Buildings”
2. Bolted Connections: Comply with RCSC’s Specification for Structural Joints
Using High Strength Bolts”
3. Primary Framing: Shop fabricate framing components to indicated size and
section with baseplates, bearing plates, stiffeners, and other items required
for erection welded into place. Cut, form, punch, drill, and weld framing for
bolted field assembly.
a. Make shop connections by welding or by using high-strength bolts.
b. Join flanges to webs of built-up members by a continuous submerged
arc-welding process.
c. Brace compression flange of primary framing with steel angles or coldformed structural tubing between frame web and purlin or girt web, so
flange compressive strength is within allowable limits for any
combination of loadings.
d. Weld clips to frames for attaching secondary framing members.
e. Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces for shop priming according to SSPCSP 2. Shop prime primary structural members with specified primer after
fabrication.
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
13120 - 17
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
4. Secondary Framing: Shop fabricate framing components to indicated size
and section by roll-forming or break-forming, with baseplates, bearing
plates, stiffeners, and other plates required for erection welded into place.
Cut, form, punch, drill, and weld secondary framing for bolted field
connections to primary framing.
a. Make shop connections by welding or by using non-high-strength bolts.
b. Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated surfaces for shop priming according to
SSPC-SP 2. Shop prime uncoated secondary structural members with
specified primer after fabrication.
B. Primary Framing: Manufacturer's standard structural primary framing system,
designed to withstand required loads and specified requirements. Primary
framing includes transverse and lean-to frames; rafter, rake, and canopy
beams; sidewall, intermediate, end-wall, and corner columns; and wind
bracing.
1. General: Provide frames with attachment plates, bearing plates, and splice
members. Factory drill for field-bolted assembly. Provide frame span and
spacing indicated.
a. Slight variations in span and spacing may be acceptable if necessary to
meet manufacturer's standard, as approved by Architect.
2. Rigid Clear-Span Frames: I-shaped frame sections fabricated from shopwelded, built-up steel plates or structural-steel shapes. Interior columns are
not permitted.
3. Rigid Modular Frames: I-shaped frame sections fabricated from shopwelded, built-up steel plates or structural-steel shapes. Provide interior
columns fabricated from round steel pipe or tube, or shop-welded, built-up
steel plates.
4. Truss-Frame, Clear-Span Frames: Rafter frames fabricated from joist
girders, and I-shaped column sections fabricated from shop-welded, builtup steel plates or structural-steel shapes.
5. Truss-Frame Modular Frames: Rafter frames fabricated from joist girders,
and I-shaped column sections fabricated from shop-welded, built-up steel
plates or structural-steel shapes. Provide interior columns fabricated from
round steel pipe or tube, or shop-welded, built-up steel plates.
6. Long-Bay Frames: I-shaped frame sections fabricated from shop-welded,
built-up steel plates or structural-steel shapes. Provide interior columns
fabricated from round steel pipes or tubes, or shop-welded, built-up steel
plates.
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
13120 - 18
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
7. Frame Configuration: Two-directional sloped. Reference drawings
8. Exterior Column Type: Uniform depth or tapered
9. Rafter Type: Uniform depth or tapered
C. End-Wall Framing: Manufacturer's standard primary end-wall framing
fabricated for field-bolted assembly to comply with the following:
1. End-Wall and Corner Columns: I-shaped sections fabricated from
structural-steel shapes; shop-welded, built-up steel plates; or C-shaped,
cold-formed, structural-steel sheet; with minimum thickness of 0.0598”.
2. End-Wall Rafters: C-shaped, cold-formed, structural-steel sheet; with
minimum thickness of 0.0598”; or I-shaped sections fabricated from shopwelded, built-up steel plates or structural-steel shapes.
D. Secondary Framing: Manufacturer's standard secondary framing members,
including purlins, girts, eave struts, flange bracing, base members, gable
angles, clips, headers, jambs, and other miscellaneous structural members.
Fabricate framing from cold-formed, structural-steel sheet or roll-formed,
metallic-coated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating, unless otherwise
indicated, to comply with the following:
1. Purlins: C- or Z-shaped sections; fabricated from minimum 0.0598” thick
steel sheet, built-up steel plates, or structural-steel shapes; minimum 2-1/2”
wide flanges.
a. Depth: As required to comply with system performance requirements
2. Purlins: Steel joists of depths required to comply with system performance
requirements.
3. Girts: C- or Z-shaped sections; fabricated from minimum 0.0598” thick steel
sheet, built-up steel plates, or structural-steel shapes. Form ends of Zsections with stiffening lips angled 40 to 50 degrees to flange and with
minimum 2-1/2” wide flanges.
a. Depth: As required to comply with system performance requirements.
4. Eave Struts: Unequal-flange, C-shaped sections; fabricated from 0.0598”
thick steel sheet, built-up steel plates, or structural-steel shapes; to provide
adequate backup for metal panels.
5. Flange Bracing: Minimum 2”-by-2”-by-1/8”- structural-steel angles or 1”
diameter, cold-formed structural tubing to stiffen primary frame flanges.
6. Sag Bracing: Minimum 1”-by-1”-by-1/8” structural-steel angles or ¾”
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
13120 - 19
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
diameter rods
7. Base or Sill Angles: Minimum 3”-by-2”-by-0.0598” zinc-coated (galvanized)
steel sheet.
8. Purlin and Girt Clips: Minimum 0.0598” thick, steel sheet. Provide
galvanized clips where clips are connected to galvanized framing members.
9. Secondary End-Wall Framing: Manufacturer's standard sections fabricated
from minimum 0.0598” thick, zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet.
10. Framing for Openings: Channel shapes; fabricated from minimum 0.0598”
thick, cold-formed, structural-steel sheet or structural-steel shapes. Frame
head and jamb of door openings, and head, jamb, and sill of other openings.
11. Miscellaneous Structural Members: Manufacturer's standard sections
fabricated from cold-formed, structural-steel sheet; built-up steel plates; or
zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet; designed to withstand required loads.
E. Canopy Framing: Manufacturer's standard structural-framing system, designed
to withstand required loads, fabricated from shop-welded, built-up steel plates
or structural-steel shapes. Provide frames with attachment plates and splice
members, factory drilled for field-bolted assembly.
1. Type: Straight-beam, eave type.
F. Bracing: Provide adjustable wind bracing as follows:
1. Rods: ASTM A 36/A 36M; ASTM A 572/A 572M, Grade 50 (345); or ASTM
A 529/A 529M, Grade 50 (345); minimum 1/2" diameter steel; threaded full
length or threaded a minimum of 6” at each end.
2. Cable: ASTM A 475, 1/4" diameter, extra-high-strength grade, Class B zinccoated, 7-strand steel; with threaded end anchors.
3. Angles: Fabricated from structural-steel shapes to match primary framing,
of size required to withstand design loads.
4. Rigid Portal Frames: Fabricate from shop-welded, built-up steel plates or
structural-steel shapes to match primary framing; of size required to
withstand design loads.
5. Fixed-Base Columns: Fabricate from shop-welded, built-up steel plates or
structural-steel shapes to match primary framing; of size required to
withstand design loads.
6. Diaphragm Action of Metal Panels: Design metal building to resist wind
forces through diaphragm action of metal panels.
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
13120 - 20
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
7. Bracing: Provide wind bracing using any method specified above, at
manufacturer's option.
G. Bolts: Provide plain finish bolts for structural-framing components that are
primed or finish painted. Provide hot-dipped galvanized bolts for structuralframing components that are galvanized.
H. Factory-Primed Finish: Apply specified primer immediately after cleaning and
pretreating.
1. Prime primary, secondary, and end-wall structural-framing members to a
minimum dry film thickness of 1 mil.
a. Prime secondary steel framing formed from uncoated steel sheet to a
minimum dry film thickness of 0.5 mil on each side.
2. Prime galvanized members with specified primer, after phosphoric acid
pretreatment.
2.09
DOORS AND FRAMES
A. Swinging Personnel Doors and Frames: Metal building system manufacturer's
standard doors and frames; prepared and reinforced at strike and hinges to
receive factory- and field-applied hardware according to ANSI/DHI A115
Series.
1. Steel Doors: 1-3/4” thick; fabricated from 0.0329” uncoated thickness,
metallic-coated steel face sheets; of styles indicated; seamless at both
vertical edges; with 0.0528” uncoated thickness, inverted metallic-coated
steel channels welded to face sheets at top and bottom of door.
a. Core: Kraft honeycomb with U-factor rating of at least 0.47 Btu/sq. ft. x
h x deg F
b. Core: Polystyrene foam with U-factor rating of at least 0.16 Btu/sq. ft. x
h x deg F
c. Core: Polyurethane foam with U-factor rating of at least 0.07 Btu/sq. ft.
x h x deg F
2. Steel Frames: Fabricate 2” wide face frames from 0.0528” uncoated
thickness, metallic-coated steel sheet.
a. Type: Factory welded.
3. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels, and
moldings from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet.
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
13120 - 21
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
4. Hardware: Refer to section 08710.
5. Anchors and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard units, galvanized
according to ASTM A 123/A 123M.
6. Fabrication: Fabricate doors and frames to be rigid; neat in appearance;
and free from defects, warp, or buckle. Provide continuous welds on
exposed joints; grind, dress, and make welds smooth, flush, and invisible.
7. Finishes for Personnel Doors and Frames:
a. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces with nonpetroleum solvent so
surfaces are free of oil and other contaminants. After cleaning, apply a
conversion coating suited to the organic coating to be applied over it.
Clean welds, mechanical connections, and abraded areas, and apply
galvanizing repair paint specified below to comply with ASTM A 780.
1) Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint
regalvanizing welds in steel, complying with SSPC-Paint 20.
for
b. Factory Priming for Field-Painted Finish: Where field painting after
installation is indicated, apply the primer specified below immediately
after cleaning and pretreating.
1) Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and
chromate-free primer complying with ANSI A250.10 acceptance
criteria.
c. Baked-Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply
manufacturer's standard 2-coat, baked-enamel finish consisting of prime
coat and thermosetting topcoat, with a minimum dry film thickness of 1
mil for topcoat.
2.10
ACCESSORIES
A. General: Provide accessories as standard with metal building system
manufacturer and as specified. Fabricate and finish accessories at the factory
to greatest extent possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and
processes. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural
requirements.
1. Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil
canning, buckling, and tool marks and that are true to line and levels
indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.
B. Flashing and Trim: Formed from minimum 0.0159” thick, metallic-coated steel
sheet or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating;
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
13120 - 22
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
finished to match adjacent metal panels.
1. Provide flashing and trim as required to seal against weather and to provide
finished appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, eaves, rakes,
corners, bases, framed openings, ridges, fasciae, and fillers.
2. Opening Trim: Minimum 0.0269” thick, metallic-coated steel sheet or
aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating. Trim
head and jamb of door openings, and head, jamb, and sill of other openings.
C. Gutters: Formed from minimum 0.0159” thick, metallic-coated steel sheet or
aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating; finished to
match roof fascia and rake trim. Match profile of gable trim, complete with end
pieces, outlet tubes, and other special pieces as required. Fabricate in
minimum 96” long sections, sized according to SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet
Metal Manual."
1. Gutter Supports: Fabricated from same material and finish as gutters;
spaced 36” on center.
2. Strainers: Bronze, copper, or aluminum wire ball type at outlets.
D. Downspouts: Formed from 0.0159” thick, zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet
or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating; finished
to match metal wall panels. Fabricate in minimum 10’-0” long sections,
complete with formed elbows and offsets.
1. Mounting Straps: Fabricated from same material and finish as gutters;
spaced 10’-0” on center.
E. Louvers: Size and design indicated; self-framing and self-flashing. Fabricate
welded frames from minimum 0.0428” thick, metallic-coated steel sheet;
finished to match metal wall panels. Form blades from 0.0329” thick, metalliccoated steel sheet; folded or beaded at edges, set at an angle that excludes
driving rains, and secured to frames by riveting or welding. Fabricate louvers
with equal blade spacing to produce uniform appearance.
1. Blades: Fixed.
2. Bird Screening: Galvanized steel, 1/2" square mesh, 0.041” wire; with
rewirable frames, removable and secured with clips, fabricated of same kind
and form of metal and with same finish as for louvers.
a. Mounting: Exterior face of louvers.
F. Pipe Flashing: Premolded, EPDM pipe collar with flexible aluminum ring
bonded to base.
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
13120 - 23
July 28, 2016
2.11
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM’s “Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal
Products” for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent
pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved
Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable.
Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within
the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize
contrast.
2.12
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: SEPTA will engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency
to perform the following tests and inspections and to submit reports.
1. Special Inspector: SEPTA will engage a qualified special inspector to
perform the following tests and inspections and to submit reports. Special
Inspector will verify that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and
quality-control procedures and will review the completeness and adequacy
of those procedures to perform the Work.
a. Special inspections will not be required if fabrication is performed by a
manufacturer registered and approved by authorities having jurisdiction
to perform such Work without special inspection.
1) After fabrication, submit certificate of compliance with copy to
authorities having jurisdiction certifying that Work was performed
according to Contract requirements.
2. Tests and Inspections:
a. Bolted Connections: Shop-bolted connections shall be tested and
inspected according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using
ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
b. Welded Connections: In addition to visual inspection, shop-welded
connections shall be tested and inspected according to AWS D1.1 and
the following inspection procedures, at inspector's option:
1) Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165.
2) Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass
and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or
penetration will not be accepted.
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
13120 - 24
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
3) Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164.
4) Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.
3. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate do
not comply with the Contract Drawings and Specifications.
PART 3
3.01
EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Erector present, for
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting performance of work.
1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Erector, listing
conditions detrimental to performance of work.
B. Before erection proceeds, survey elevations and locations of concrete- and
masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and
other embedments to receive structural framing, with Erector present, for
compliance with requirements and metal building system manufacturer’s
tolerances.
1. Engage land surveyor to perform surveying.
C. Proceed with erection only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02
PREPARATION
A. Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer’s written
instructions for each particular substrate condition.
B. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to
keep structural framing secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary
construction loads and loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove
temporary supports when permanent structural framing, connections, and
bracing are in place, unless otherwise indicated.
3.03
ERECTION OF STRUCTURAL FRAMING
A. Erect metal building system according to manufacturer's written erection
instructions and erection drawings.
B. Do not field cut, drill, or alter structural members without written approval from
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
13120 - 25
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
metal building system manufacturer's professional engineer.
C. Set structural framing accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and
according to AISC specifications referenced in this Section. Maintain structural
stability of frame during erection.
D. Base and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of
bond-reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean
bottom surface of plates.
1. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as
required.
2. Tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and
plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush
with edge of plate before packing with grout.
3. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no
voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to
cure. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for
shrinkage-resistant grouts.
E. Align and adjust structural framing before permanently fastening. Before
assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent
contact with framing. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for
discrepancies in elevations and alignment.
1. Level and plumb individual members of structure.
2. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and
mean temperature when structure will be completed and in service.
F. Primary Framing and End Walls: Erect framing true to line, level, plumb, rigid,
and secure. Level baseplates to a true even plane with full bearing to
supporting structures, set with double-nutted anchor bolts. Use grout to obtain
uniform bearing and to maintain a level base-line elevation. Moist cure grout
for not less than seven (7) days after placement.
1. Make field connections using high-strength bolts installed according to
RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490
Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified.
a. Joint Type: Snug tightened or pretensioned.
G. Secondary Framing: Erect framing true to line, level, plumb, rigid, and secure.
Fasten secondary framing to primary framing using clips with field connections
using non-high-strength bolts.
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
13120 - 26
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
1. Provide rake or gable purlins with tight-fitting closure channels and fasciae.
2. Locate and space wall girts to suit openings such as doors and windows.
3. Locate canopy framing as indicated.
4. Provide supplemental framing at entire perimeter of openings, including
doors, windows, louvers, ventilators, and other penetrations of roof and
walls.
H. Bracing: Install bracing in roof and sidewalls where indicated on erection
drawings.
1. Tighten rod and cable bracing to avoid sag.
2. Locate interior end-bay bracing only where indicated.
I. Framing for Openings: Provide shapes of proper design and size to reinforce
openings and to carry loads and vibrations imposed, including equipment
furnished under mechanical and electrical work. Securely attach to structural
framing.
J. Erection Tolerances: Maintain erection tolerances of structural framing within
AISC’s “Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges.”
3.04
METAL WALL PANEL INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. General: Install metal wall panels in orientation, sizes, and locations indicated
on Drawings. Install panels perpendicular to girts and subgirts, unless
otherwise indicated. Anchor metal wall panels and other components of the
Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement.
1. Field cutting of metal wall panels by torch is not permitted.
2. Rigidly fasten metal wall panels and allow for thermal expansion and
contraction as required by the panel manufacturer. Pre-drill panels as
required.
3. Install screw fasteners.
4. Locate panel splices over, but not attached to, structural supports. Stagger
panel splices and end laps to avoid a four-panel lap splice condition.
5. Apply elastomeric sealant continuously between metal base channel (sill
angle) and concrete, and elsewhere as indicated or, if not indicated, as
necessary for waterproofing and material compatibility.
6. Provide weatherproof seals for pipe and conduit penetrating exterior walls.
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
13120 - 27
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
B. Fasteners: Use fasteners of size and length as required for compatibility with
substrate.
1. Aluminum Wall Panels: Use stainless-steel fasteners or metallic coated
fasteners for surfaces exposed to the exterior and aluminum or galvanized
steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the interior.
2. Concealed fasteners shall have a high performance coating
3. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or
corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact
surfaces with bituminous coating, by applying rubberized-asphalt
underlayment to each contact surface, or by other permanent separation as
recommended by metal wall panel manufacturer.
4. Coat back side of aluminum wall panels with bituminous coating where wall
panels will contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.
C. Joint Sealers: Install gaskets, joint fillers, and sealants where indicated and
where required for weatherproof performance of metal wall panel assemblies.
3.05
DOOR AND FRAME INSTALLATION
A. General: Install doors and frames plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely
fastened in place according to manufacturer's written instructions. Coordinate
installation with wall flashings and other components. Seal perimeter of each
door frame with elastomeric sealant used for metal wall panels.
B. Personnel Doors and Frames: Install doors and frames according to ANSI
A250.8. Shim as necessary to comply with DHI A115.IG. Fit non-fire-rated
doors accurately in their respective frames, with the following clearances:
1. Between Doors and Frames at Jambs and Head: 1/8”
2. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8”.
3. At Door Sills with Threshold: 3/8”.
4. At Door Sills without Threshold: 3/4".
5. At fire-rated openings, install frames according to, and doors with
clearances specified in, NFPA 80.
C. Door Hardware: Mount units at heights indicated in DHI's "Recommended
Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames."
1. Install surface-mounted items after finishes have been completed on
substrates involved.
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
13120 - 28
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
2. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce
attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation.
3. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage
fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards.
4. Set thresholds for exterior doors in full bed of butyl-rubber or
polyisobutylene mastic sealant complying with requirements specified in
Section 07900, Joint Sealers.
3.06
ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and
weathertight mounting, and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate
installation with flashings and other components.
1. Install components required for a complete metal roof panel assembly
including trim, copings, ridge closures, seam covers, flashings, sealants,
gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items.
2. Install components for a complete metal wall panel assembly including trim,
copings, corners, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure
strips, and similar items.
3. Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates,
protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous
coating, by applying rubberized-asphalt underlayment to each contact
surface, or by other permanent separation as recommended by
manufacturer.
B. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's
written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal
Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line
and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be
permanently watertight and weather resistant.
1. Install exposed flashing and trim that is without excessive oil canning,
buckling, and tool marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with
exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and
trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof and weather-resistant
performance.
2. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing
and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10’-0” with no joints
allowed within 24” of corner or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet-type
expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weather
resistant and waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
13120 - 29
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
flanges, not less than 1” deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within
joints).
C. Gutters: Join sections with riveted and soldered or lapped and sealed joints.
Attach gutters to eave with gutter hangers spaced not more than 4’-0” on center
using manufacturer's standard fasteners. Provide end closures and seal
watertight with sealant. Provide for thermal expansion.
D. Downspouts: Join sections with 1-1/2” telescoping joints. Provide fasteners
designed to hold downspouts securely 1” away from walls; locate fasteners at
top and bottom and at approximately 60” on center in between.
1. Provide elbows at base of downspouts to direct water away from building.
2. Tie downspouts to underground drainage system indicated.
E. Circular Roof Ventilators: Set ventilators complete with necessary hardware,
anchors, dampers, weather guards, rain caps, and equipment supports. Mount
ventilators on flat level base. Install preformed filler strips at base to seal
ventilator to metal roof panels.
F. Continuous Roof Ventilators: Set ventilators complete with necessary
hardware, anchors, dampers, weather guards, rain caps, and equipment
supports. Join sections with splice plates and end-cap skirt assemblies where
required to achieve indicated length. Install preformed filler strips at base to
seal ventilator to metal roof panels.
G. Louvers: Locate and place louver units level, plumb, and at indicated alignment
with adjacent work.
1. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers
fitted to screws where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a
weathertight connection.
2. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and
joint fillers.
3. Protect galvanized- and nonferrous-metal surfaces from corrosion or
galvanic action by applying a heavy coating of bituminous paint on surfaces
that will be in contact with concrete, masonry, or dissimilar metals.
4. Install concealed gaskets, flashings, joint fillers, and insulation as louver
installation progresses, where weathertight louver joints are required.
Comply with Section 07900, SEALS AND SEALANTS, for sealants applied
during louver installation.
H. Roof Curbs: Install curbs at locations indicated on Contract Drawings. Install
flashing around bases where they meet metal roof panels.
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
13120 - 30
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
I. Pipe Flashing: Form flashing around pipe penetration and metal roof panels.
Fasten and seal to panel as recommended by manufacturer.
3.07
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Tests and Inspections:
1. High-Strength, Field-Bolted Connections: Connections shall be tested and
inspected during installation according to RCSC's "Specification for
Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
2. Welded Connections: In addition to visual inspection, field-welded
connections shall be tested and inspected according to AWS D1.1 and the
following inspection procedures, at inspector's option:
a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165.
b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and
on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration
will not be accepted.
c. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164.
d. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.
B. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not
comply with the Contract Drawings and Specifications.
3.08
ADJUSTING
A. Doors: After completing installation, test and adjust doors to operate easily, free
of warp, twist, or distortion.
B. Door Hardware: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and
each door to ensure proper operation and function of every unit. Replace units
that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended.
1. Door Closers: Adjust door closers to compensate for final operation of
heating and ventilating equipment. Adjust sweep period so that, from an
open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at least three (3) seconds to
move to a point 3” from the latch, measured to the leading edge of the door.
C. Adjustable Louvers: After completing installation, including work by other
trades, lubricate, test, and adjust units to operate easily, free of warp, twist, or
distortion as needed to provide fully functioning units.
1. Adjust louver blades to be weathertight when in closed position.
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
13120 - 31
July 28, 2016
3.09
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Repair damaged galvanized coatings on galvanized items with galvanized
repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded,
or damaged during construction period.
C. Touchup Painting: After erection, promptly clean, prepare, and prime or reprime
field connections, rust spots, and abraded surfaces of prime-painted structural
framing, bearing plates, and accessories.
1. Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning," or
SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
2. Apply a compatible primer of same type as shop primer used on adjacent
surfaces.
D. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting are specified in Section
09900 Paints and Coatings.
E. Metal Panels: Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if
any, as metal panels are installed. On completion of metal panel installation,
clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal panel manufacturer.
Maintain in a clean condition during construction.
1. Replace metal panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated
beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair
procedures.
F. Doors and Frames: Immediately after installation, sand smooth rusted or
damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying
primer.
1. Immediately before final inspection, remove protective wrappings from
doors and frames.
G. Louvers: Clean exposed surfaces that are not protected by temporary covering,
to remove fingerprints and soil during construction period. Do not let soil
accumulate until final cleaning.
1. Restore louvers damaged during installation and construction period so no
evidence remains of corrective work. If results of restoration are
unsuccessful, as determined by Architect, remove damaged units and
replace with new units.
a. Touch up minor abrasions in finishes with air-dried coating that matches
color and gloss of, and is compatible with, factory-applied finish coating.
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
13120 - 32
July 28, 2016
3.10
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train SEPTA's
maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain operable accessories.
END OF SECTION
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
13120 - 33
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
SECTION 14095-SHIM CARRIAGE EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.02
1.03
Requirements for designing, furnishing, installing and testing the Shim
Carriage Equipment used to allow shimming railroad trucks after truing the
wheelsets of certain types of railroad passenger coaches.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 11000 – Equipment General Requirements
B.
Division 16 – Electrical
STANDARDS AND REGULATIONS
A.
Industry and Safety Standards: Conform to the Sections of the following
Standards and Codes as applicable to the work of this Section, listed in
Section 11000.
B.
All applicable provisions of the state and local building and safety codes
and any other codes referenced therein.
C.
For components not manufactured in the United States of America (USA)
NEMA shall apply for electrical/electronic details and shall meet or exceed
the National Electric Code, latest edition. Materials shall comply with ISO,
EN and meet or exceed ISO 9000 quality standards. If there is a
discrepancy between the non-USA standards and the USA standards the
most stringent shall apply and shall be approved by the Engineer.
D.
Fasteners: USA components shall conform to ANSI standards and nonUSA components shall conform to ISO (metric) standards. This shall
include but not be limited to threads for nuts and bolts, heads for same,
pipe, conduit, and electrical connectors. Mixing of metric and ANSI
standards on the same equipment shall not be permitted.
E.
Electrical Apparatus Safety: All electrical apparatus shall be UL listed or
exceed UL standards for non-USA products.
SHIM CARRIAGE EQUIPMENT
14095-1
June 9, 2016
1.04
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Final
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
C.
Fabrication and Installation
1.
The equipment shall be fabricated from newly manufactured
materials, products and components.
Used, refurbished or
remanufactured materials, products or components shall not be
utilized.
2.
Equipment components shall be standard products, currently
produced by reputable manufacturers. Non-standard, prototype,
obsolete or discontinued products shall not be utilized.
3.
Surfaces to receive metal fabrications will be sound, square and
true. Such surfaces shall be examined by the manufacturer prior to
installation of the fabrications and all defects which might impair the
operability or shorten the life of any of the parts of the equipment
shall be indicated to the Contractor.
Qualification of Manufacturers:
1.
Manufacturer shall be a reputable manufacturing firm, regularly
engaged in the design and manufacture of the type of
industrial/railroad equipment specified herein.
2.
Manufacturer shall demonstrate a history of successful production,
reviewed by the Engineer.
3.
Assembled components, purchased by the Manufacturer for this
Contract, such as pneumatic/hydraulic hoists, electrical devices,
etc. shall be standard, commercially available components and
shall be manufactured by companies regularly engaged in the
manufacture of the components.
4.
All similar items shall be the products of a single manufacturer.
The design shall provide for the interchange ability of items of
piping, equipment, sub-assemblies, motors, starters and relays.
5.
The Manufacturer shall provide, with the submission of the first
shop drawings, the following information:
a.
Detailed information listing country of origin for components
to be purchased by the Manufacturer and furnished as part
of this Contract.
SHIM CARRIAGE EQUIPMENT
14095-2
May 16, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
b.
D.
1.06
Shop drawings and other documents, provided by the
Manufacturer, that pertain to the structural components of the
equipment to be provided under the work of this Section must be
sealed by a licensed Engineering Professional, shall be reviewed
and sealed by an Engineering Professional qualified, registered,
and licensed to practice in the particular professional field involved,
in the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania.
Supervision of Installation, Testing and Training
1.
1.05
Detailed information on locations where fabrication and/or
assembly operations for the equipment to be furnished as
part of this Contract are to take place.
Registration of Designer(s)
1.
E.
Final
Provide a manufacturer's field service representative to supervise
the Contractor during installation of the equipment, to conduct
acceptance testing, and to train the SEPTA’s personnel in the
proper operation and maintenance of the equipment. The field
service representative shall be a qualified supervisor employed by
the manufacturer, who is thoroughly trained in the installation of
equipment being furnished; and who shall be present at the site to
direct the installation of the equipment being furnished.
DELIVERABLES
A.
All material shall be furnished in accordance with Section 11000 as
supplemented and/or modified by the requirements of this section.
B.
Provide one gallon of matching touch up paint for each color used.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
The Manufacturer shall be responsible for packing the system
components in such a way as to adequately protect them against damage
during transportation, unloading, setting in place, and assembly.
B.
The Manufacturer shall pay all charges, fees, insurance, import/export
duties, custom fees and all expenses related to transportation of the
system and accessories to the site.
C.
Manufacturer shall provide all necessary labor, materials, hoisting
equipment, tools and all incidentals required to set the components in
their intended locations and completely assemble same.
SHIM CARRIAGE EQUIPMENT
14095-3
June 9, 2016
1.07
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Final
D.
Manufacturer shall familiarize himself or herself with the schedule and
limitations of delivering the equipment to the site. Delivery to the site is to
be by trucking.
E.
All miscellaneous materials, tools and spare parts shall be delivered to the
site in sealed containers adequately protected against the intrusion of
moisture or foreign matter. Items shall be carefully stored at the site as
required in a manner to prevent misalignment or distortion, and shall be
adequately protected against damage by weather or other cause.
F.
Special precautions shall be taken to prevent damage to electrical
components such as motors, control panels and conductors.
G.
All materials shall be delivered to the site with their original manufacturer’s
markings and identification intact. The Engineer reserves the right to
reject materials that are damaged, improperly identified or not in
conformance with reviewed shop drawings and catalog cuts.
H.
Upon completion of work, the Manufacturer shall be responsible for
leaving the building and premises in good order, including removal of
temporary installations, Manufacturer-owned materials, and shipping and
packaging materials used by the Manufacturer in support of delivery,
installation and/or acceptance of the equipment being provided under this
Section.
VERIFICATION OF DIMENSIONS AND COORDINATION
A.
The Manufacturer shall be responsible for coordination and proper
relation of all work to the building structure.
B.
The Manufacturer shall verify and coordinate with SEPTA all dimensions
and weights of the rolling stock (in particular the coach truck configuration,
and wheelset dimensions, weight, and brake configuration) that relate to
fabrication of the system and notify the Engineer of any discrepancy
before ordering equipment and material, and starting fabrication or
installation.
C.
The Manufacturer shall be responsible for reviewing the drawings of the
building and pits and adapt the layout of the proposed equipment to fit the
pits and building. Modifications to the pits may be proposed, however
such modifications shall not require modifications to the building structure,
the depth of the pits, or reduce clearances to adjacent tracks. The cost of
any modifications requested after the initial bid shall be the responsibility
of the manufacturer.
SHIM CARRIAGE EQUIPMENT
14095-4
May 16, 2016
1.08
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Final
SUBMITTALS
A.
The Manufacturer’s technical documentation shall meet or exceed
Industry, Safety and Government standards, and shall be capable of
clearly defining the system design, testing or operational criteria,
specifications or requirements. The technical documentation shall detail
each system to the level required to ensure consistency, quality and
reliability.
B.
Vendor’s experience and qualifications, and current points-of-contact
(name, mailing address, telephone) to be submitted for review by
Engineer.
C.
Preliminary dimensioned drawings indicating conceptual configuration of
split rail assembly, lift cart and range of motion, details of required service
(e.g., electrical and compressed air) as well as catalog cuts indicating
operation, dimensions, and all features for all equipment to be supplied,
shall be furnished for review by the Engineer
D.
Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures which, when
reviewed by the Engineer, shall be the basis for accepting or rejecting
installation procedures used on the work.
E.
Shop Drawings in accordance with requirements of Specification Section
11000 and as supplemented below:
1.
Submit sets of complete catalog information and dimensioned shop
drawings. Tolerances, clearances, and dimensions shall follow the
system of ounces, pounds, gallons, inches, and feet, as used the
design in the United States (metric conversions may be provided
parenthetically). As a minimum, drawings are to include:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
2.
Wiring and control schematic and detail electrical diagrams
Shim carriage assembly
Details of interface with structure, track and facilities,
including all foundation embedments and maximum
electrical requirements.
Outline dimensions of equipment.
Equipment and component layout.
Details of equipment, controls, and interlocks.
Installation details.
Details of lubrication and other special systems.
Catalog cuts for all equipment/systems furnished.
SHIM CARRIAGE EQUIPMENT
14095-5
June 9, 2016
F.
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Calculations
1.
Design calculations indicating compliance with cited standards and
accepted engineering practices, and sealed by a registered
Professional Engineer registered in the Commonwealth of
Pennsylvania. Calculations shall include, but not be limited to:
a.
b.
c.
G.
Final
Loading diagrams to demonstrate adequacy of shim carriage
assembly, when in the closed and locked position, to
accommodate an E-72 loading at any point along the
assembly rail without shifting or rotating about any axis.
Demonstrate adequacy of lift trolley capacity for specified
rolling stock.
As may be set forth elsewhere in Contract Documents.
Operation and Maintenance Manuals in accordance with requirements of
Specification Section 11000 and as supplemented below:
1.
Submit for approval, as part of the shop drawing phase, two
complete copies of the Operation and Maintenance Manual(s) to
the Engineer. After approval, furnish complete copies of the
manual (or set of manuals), and one separate set of full-size plastic
film reproducibles of all drawings and diagrams.
a.
b.
2.
Parts Catalog:
a.
b.
3.
Furnish all information necessary for proper operation and
maintenance of the equipment.
Operation and maintenance manuals shall be in accordance
with the requirements specified in Section 11000.
Enumerate and describe every component and its related
parts, including identifying OEM numbers and commercial
equivalents where applicable.
Cut-away and exploded-view drawings for identification of all
parts.
Spare parts:
a.
b.
Submit recommendations for spare parts inventory including
types and quantities considered normal for routine
maintenance of the equipment for one year.
Submit recommendations for spare parts inventory including
types and quantities considered critical and for which
extended acquisition time would create excessive downtime
SHIM CARRIAGE EQUIPMENT
14095-6
May 16, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
c.
d.
Final
Within 60 days SEPTA will determine parts and quantities to
be furnished.
After approval, furnish five approved parts lists as adjuncts
of the Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
H.
The manufacturer shall bind the above items (drawings, manuals, parts
catalogs, parts lists) -- all unused, clean and legible -- in heavy notebook
covers, and deliver to SEPTA prior to request for final acceptance.
I.
All field testing procedures, submitted to the Engineer at least thirty
calendar days prior to installation and testing.
J.
Detailed information as to the location where fabrication assembly and
testing operations are to be performed.
K.
Vendor's certification that proposed equipment meets or exceeds
specification requirements.
L.
Proposed training program.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MANUFACTURER
A.
The Shim Carriage Equipment shall be manufactured by one of the
following manufacturers, or approved equal:
1.
Macton Corporation
116 Willenbrock Road
Oxford, CT 06478
Tel: 203-267-1500
(www.macton.com)
2.
Handling Specialty
PO Box 98
219 South Service Road West
Grimsby, ON L3M 4G1
Tel: (905) 945-9661
(www.handling.com)
3.
Whiting Equipment Canada Inc.
350 Alexander Street
Welland, Niagara, ON L3B 2R3
(905) 732-7585
(www.whiting.ca)
SHIM CARRIAGE EQUIPMENT
14095-7
June 9, 2016
2.02
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Final
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
The shim carriage equipment shall be placed in accordance with the
general arrangement as shown on the Contract Drawings. The general
arrangement may be modified only as required to suit the specific
equipment being supplied. Layout dimensions as shown may be modified
to improve operating efficiency and/or to minimize potential obstructions in
the path of personnel and vehicles. Any modifications required to the
building design to accommodate the equipment shall be the responsibility
of the Contractor and shall be provided by the Contractor at no additional
cost to SEPTA. Changes shall be specifically approved by the Engineer.
B.
Provide a lift trolley assembly that shall operate on rails located in the
track pit, equipped with four electrically operated screw jack units and that
shall have the following capabilities:
1.
Lift a pair of inside bearing truck equalizing bars on a single truck
such that the passenger coach truck equalizing bar support bearing
is separated from the wheelset bearing, so that a shims can be
placed between the equalizing bar support and the wheelset
bearings on both axles on a truck.
D.
Any component that cannot be easily removed by 1 or 2 people, or weighs
more than 100 LBS, shall include provisions for material handling (e.g.
lifting eyes).
E.
Products or composite materials containing asbestos, lead, mercury or
cadmium shall not be utilized.
F.
Only materials and coatings which will not be detrimentally affected by
commercial cleaning agents (mild organic acid base; mild alkaline, no free
base), fuels, lubricants, coolants, and atmospheric pollutants shall be
utilized.
G.
All hinges and latches shall be metallic and shall be protected from
corrosion, either by inherent material properties or by auxiliary protective
platings or coatings.
H.
All joints, connections, and contacts between dissimilar metals shall be
suitably protected against galvanic action.
SHIM CARRIAGE EQUIPMENT
14095-8
May 16, 2016
2.03
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Final
LIFT TROLLEY ASSEMBLY
A.
B.
Frame on flanged wheels that lifts and lowers coach truck equalizer bars
on both sides of a single inboard bearing truck to allow replacement of
shims on wheelset bearings.
Shall be constructed of all-welded steel, and the top surface of the deck
shall be covered with checkered non-skid plate and be able to support two
workmen (with tools) standing on the top plate.
C.
Wheels shall be steel with solid steel axles and antifriction axle bearings.
D.
A release shall be provided to allow the lift trolley to be pushed manually
in the event of propulsion failure.
E.
Lift trolley shall have a minimum lifting capacity of 84,000 pounds.
F.
Lift trolley travel shall be prevented while lifting or lowering loads.
F.
Operating speeds shall be within the following limits:
1.
Travel within pit (high speed):
100 FPM
2.
Travel (jog):
3 FPM
3.
Jack Lift Speed:
2 FPM
G.
The split rail trolley track will be imbedded in the pit floor. No equipment
on the lift trolley, except the single flanged wheels, shall be lower than ½
inch above the pit floor.
H.
Lift trolley shall be equipped with the following:
1.
Four elevating screw jacks arranged in an inverted mode.
2.
Screw jacks shall be self-locking, requiring power to be applied for
movement up or down.
3.
Screw jack threads shall be totally covered to prevent debris from
contacting screw surfaces.
4.
The screw jack unit shall be powered by an electric motor operating
at 480 V, 3 phase, 60 Hz shop powered from a pit-pedestal
mounted receptacle. Provide a cable wrap, with end clip, to store
the power cable onto. Provide sufficient length of power cable to
comfortably reach the power receptacle with sufficient slack.
SHIM CARRIAGE EQUIPMENT
14095-9
June 9, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Final
5.
Electric motor drive system with battery-powered drive system for
traveling the length of the pit. Battery capacity shall be sufficient
for not fewer than eight lift trolley movements the length of the pit
within an 8-hour period. Provide a “smart charge” system to recharge the batteries whenever the unit is plugged into an electrical
receptacle. Provide low maintenance “gel cell”-type batteries.
6.
Radio remote controller, which shall control the traversing
movement of the lift trolley, as well as the lifting positions of the
jack screws.
7.
Motor starter panel complete with disconnect, magnetic motor
starter for the motor, programmable logic controller, transformer to
provide 110 V control circuit, all assembled in a NEMA 12
enclosure. Enclosure shall be mounted on the lift trolley.
8.
Provide a continuous lubrication system for the screw jacks,
applying lubrication when in the lifting cycle only.
9.
A single motor shall drive all screw jacks through self-aligning drive
shaft and beveled gears
10.
The lift trolley travel wheels shall be suspended with springs so that
when the lift trolley is loaded by the weight of the truck, the force
shall collapse the suspension enough to bottom out the lift trolley to
bear on the floor of the track pit. This weight shall be distributed
into the pit floor by galvanized steel plates embedded in the pit
floor.
12.
The screw jacks shall have limit switches restricting their movement
at the top and bottom of the lift.
13.
Provide four (4) manually retractable, individually adjusted, truck
equalizer bar support arms. Each support arm shall have a
replaceable high impact resistant UHMW polyethylene pad.
14.
Provide four manually retractable truck support arms with
removable saddles and adjustment plates as required to
accommodate all coaches.
15.
Provide two fluorescent lights, one each end of the lift trolley, to
light the underside of the coach. Provide an “on/off” switch.
16.
The shim carriage lifting equipment shall be interlocked with the
travel feature so that the carriage shall only be able to travel when
the lift is in the lowest position.
SHIM CARRIAGE EQUIPMENT
14095-10
May 16, 2016
2.04
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Final
ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Equipment shall be totally wired by the equipment manufacturer starting at
the power supply point. Power supply shall be from (2) two track pedestal
mounted 480 V, 3 phase, 20 amp twist lock receptacles mounted at the
split rail locations in the track pit. Receptacle shall be NEMA configuration
L16-20R. Provided and installed by the Contractor.
B.
All motors shall be totally enclosed heavy-duty type equipped with sealed
ball bearings and overload protection. Enclosures shall be steel or cast
iron only. Aluminum end bells are permitted.
C.
Insulation shall be Class “B”.
D.
Each individual motor circuit shall be provided with branch circuit
overcurrent protection in all three phases via circuit breakers.
E.
Motor starters shall be provided with overload elements of the bimetal
thermal type on each phase.
F.
Equipment grounding shall be accomplished by means of a separate
grounding conductor in each circuit, sized according to Code. The
grounding conductor shall have green insulation.
G.
All electrical enclosures shall be minimum NEMA 12
H.
Hand held controller
1.
Provide a radio remote controller for the lift trolley, which shall
control along track movement of the lift trolley as well as the vertical
movement of the telescoping hydraulic jacking unit and traverse
movement of the transfer conveyor rail.
2.
Control buttons shall be large pushbuttons, of durable plastic,
resistant to chemicals, oil and grease, and work glove accessible.
Buttons shall be identified by permanent labels (not decals) affixed
to the panel surface by screws or rivets (not glue), using permanent
letters resistant to rubbing, chemicals, oil and grease.
3.
STOP pushbutton(s) shall be red. Pushbuttons shall be supported
to protect the electrical conductors against strain. The pushbuttons
shall be spring return to "OFF".
4.
The controller shall use a long life NiCad battery.
SHIM CARRIAGE EQUIPMENT
14095-11
June 9, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
5.
2.05
Final
The Manufacturer shall provide a bracket for storing the controller
when not in use. The bracket shall be installed on the lift carriage,
at a location that is easily reachable by a workman but cannot be
struck by a forklift or other vehicle.
SAFETY PROVISIONS
A.
Noise level shall be in conformance with NEMA MG1 Section 9.6 – Sound
Power Level and OSHA §1910.95 when measured in accordance with
IEEE 85.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
FABRICATION
A.
3.02
Fabricate equipment in accordance with all specifications and approved
shop drawings.
PAINTING
A.
Non-sliding/non-rotating surfaces shall have a primer coat of rust inhibiting
paint meeting FED-STD-TT-P-664 to a dry film thickness (DFT) of 2.5 to 3
mils.
B.
Two finish coats of alkyd enamel paint, color OSHA yellow, meeting FEDSTD-595-TT-E-489; Type I; Class 'A', shall be factory-applied over the dry
primer coat. The paint shall be applied in accordance with the paint
manufacturer's recommendations and to a DFT of 4.0 mils total.
C.
All surfaces to be used as working surfaces by personnel will be coated in
non-slip paint, with silica grit, color black.
D.
Do not paint running rail.
E.
Surfaces shall be free of rust, scale, dirt, grease and oil before painting.
F.
Matching touch-up paint shall be provided in the amount of one quart of
each color of finished topcoat used on the supplied unit, to permit
retouching marred surfaces.
G.
A corrosion resistant identification plate clearly marked and stamped with
the manufacturer's name and address, model number, serial number,
date of manufacture, and all pertinent utility or operating data (or ratings)
SHIM CARRIAGE EQUIPMENT
14095-12
May 16, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Final
shall be attached in a prominent location to each major piece of
equipment associated with the split rail system.
H.
3.03
3.04
Paints and coatings containing lead or chromate shall not be utilized.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install the equipment in accordance with the Manufacturer's installation
instructions, in the locations indicated on the Drawings. The Contractor
shall verify that the equipment furnished will fit in the space allotted with
all required clearances, and shall verify that all required pit rails and
battery recharging receptacles are in place and compatible with
equipment to be supplied under this Section.
B.
Install and connect monitoring/safety panels to power sources and to all
split rail locations.
C.
It shall be the Contractor's responsibility that all information regarding
scheduling, delivery, and preparation necessary for installation of
equipment to be supplied under this specification be verified with
equipment manufacturer and approved by the Engineer prior
commencement of the work.
the
the
the
to
FIELD ACCEPTANCE TEST
A.
Following installation, the Contractor shall ensure that the equipment
Manufacturer perform an acceptance test.
Prior to the test, the
Manufacturer shall submit for approval by the Engineer an acceptance
testing program. The program shall be designed to show that the
equipment meets all of the conditions described by this specification and
that the equipment will perform as intended.
B.
Prior to operation, a representative of the Manufacturer shall inspect the
entire installation.
C.
The representative of the Manufacturer shall conduct the tests in the
presence of the Engineer.
D.
Equipment shall be pre-checked, energized and started up by a factory
service technician following installation; this technician will thoroughly test
the equipment and provide operating personnel with instruction on the
proper operation and maintenance of the equipment. The vendor shall
provide three hardcopy reports of the Field Service Technician’s startup
operation.
SHIM CARRIAGE EQUIPMENT
14095-13
June 9, 2016
3.05
3.06
Final
E.
The test shall include demonstration of shims being added to a truck
using SEPTA’s coach. The test shall include demonstration of a wheelset
change using the SEPTA’s coach (or agreed-upon substitute) and
removal of the wheelset from the transverse pit. The Contractor shall
provide all material, (including blocking and/or stands), and manpower
required for the program except for the Owner’s rolling stock. During test,
verify the proper operation of all safety and annunciator devices.
F.
Should the system or any part thereof, in the determination of the
Engineer fail to function properly, make all modifications and adjustments
and replace impaired parts as may be required for safe and proper
operation, at no additional cost to SEPTA. Perform such additional tests
as may be necessary to verify that the equipment is operating properly
and safely.
TRAINING
A.
Provide training in accordance with the requirements of Specification
Section 11000.
B.
Provide two DVD format video’s conveying the essential information
contained in the training sessions.
C.
Furnish a letter to the SEPTA attesting to the names of persons receiving
instruction and the dates instruction took place.
SPARE PARTS
A.
3.07
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Provide spare parts list in accordance with the requirements of
Specification Section 11000.
COMPLETION
The Manufacturer’s work shall be considered complete, and final payment made,
only when:
A.
All provisions of this and related Sections have been strictly adhered to,
including delivery, installation supervision and acceptance testing of
equipment at the facility.
B.
All damage to the premises caused by the work (e.g. installation, testing)
has been repaired.
C.
The building and surrounding premises have been left in good order,
including removal of temporary installations, manufacturer-owned
materials, and shipping and packaging materials.
SHIM CARRIAGE EQUIPMENT
14095-14
May 16, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Final
D.
All guarantees, maintenance and operating instructions, parts list(s), shop
drawings, and other Submittals as defined in this Section have been
furnished to the Engineer.
E.
All factory testing, field acceptance testing, and training have been
completed to the satisfaction of the Engineer and SEPTA.
F.
All approved spare parts have been furnished to SEPTA and verified to be
new, undamaged, and having their original manufacturer’s markings and
identification intact.
END OF SECTION
SHIM CARRIAGE EQUIPMENT
14095-15
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop and Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
SECTION 15037
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
1.3
Pipes, fittings, and specialties.
Fire-protection valves.
Fire-department connections.
Sprinklers.
Alarm devices.
Manual control stations.
Control panels.
Pressure gages.
Related Sections:
1.
None.
DEFINITIONS
A.
High-Pressure Sprinkler Piping: Wet-pipe sprinkler system piping designed to
operate at working pressure higher than standard 175 psig, but not higher than
250 psig.
B.
Standard-Pressure Sprinkler Piping: Wet-pipe sprinkler system piping designed
to operate at working pressure of 175 psig maximum.
1.4
A.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS
Wet-Pipe Sprinkler System: Automatic sprinklers are attached to piping
containing water and that is connected to water supply through alarm valve.
Water discharges immediately from sprinklers when they are opened.
Sprinklers open when heat melts fusible link or destroys frangible device. Hose
connections are included if indicated.
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
15037 - 1
July 28, 2016
1.5
Frazer Shop and Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Standard-Pressure Piping System Component: Listed for 175-psig minimum
working pressure.
B.
High-Pressure Piping System Component:
working pressure.
C.
Delegated Design: Design sprinkler system(s), including comprehensive
engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance
requirements and design criteria indicated. Contractor shall be responsible and
pay the fees to Aqua Water Co, PA, water suppler to conduct required hydrant
flow tests for the site.
D.
Sprinkler system design shall conform to the requirements of FM- Data Sheets,
UL and shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
2.
3.
4.
E.
1.6
Listed for 250-psig minimum
Margin of Safety for Available Water Flow and Pressure: 10 percent,
including losses
through water-service piping, valves, and backflow
preventers.
Sprinkler Hazard Classifications: HC-3
Minimum Density for Automatic-Sprinkler Piping Design:
a.
Based on ceiling heights as per FM – DS 3-26
Maximum Protection Area per Sprinkler: Per FM – DS 3-26
Seismic Performance: Sprinkler piping shall withstand the effects of earthquake
motions determined according to NFPA 13 and ASCE/SEI 7.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities,
operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties
and accessories.
B.
Shop Drawings: For wet-pipe sprinkler systems. Include plans, elevations,
sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1.
Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
C.
Delegated-Design Submittal: For sprinkler systems indicated to comply with
performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed
and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their
preparation.
D.
Coordination Drawings: Sprinkler systems, drawn to scale, on which the
following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from
installers of the items involved:
1.
Revise subparagraphs below to suit Project.
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
15037 - 2
July 28, 2016
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Frazer Shop and Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
Domestic water piping.
Compressed air piping.
HVAC hydronic piping.
Items penetrating finished ceiling include the following:
a.
Lighting fixtures.
b.
Air outlets and inlets.
Skylights
Steel Trusses
E.
Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and professional engineer.
F.
Approved Sprinkler Piping Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to
NFPA 13, that have been approved by authorities having jurisdiction, including
hydraulic calculations if applicable.
G.
Welding certificates.
H.
Fire-hydrant flow test report.
I.
Field Test Reports and Certificates: Indicate and interpret test results for
compliance with performance requirements and as described in NFPA 13.
Include "Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping."
J.
Field quality-control reports.
K.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For sprinkler specialties to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
1.7
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications:
1.
Installer's responsibilities include designing, fabricating, and installing
sprinkler systems and providing professional engineering services needed
to assume engineering responsibility. Base calculations on results of firehydrant flow test.
a.
Engineering Responsibility:
Preparation of working plans,
calculations, and field test reports by a qualified professional
engineer.
B.
Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
C.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as
defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended
location and application.
D.
NFPA Standards:
Sprinkler system equipment, specialties, accessories,
installation, and testing shall comply with the following:
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
15037 - 3
July 28, 2016
1.
2.
3.
1.8
Frazer Shop and Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
NFPA 13, "Installation of Sprinkler Systems."
NFPA 20, "Installation of Stationary Pumps for Fire Protection."
NFPA 24, "Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their
Appurtenances."
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.9
Interruption of Existing Sprinkler Service: Do not interrupt sprinkler service to
facilities occupied by Septa or others unless permitted under the following
conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary sprinkler service
according to requirements indicated:
1.
Notify Septa no fewer than three days in advance of proposed interruption
of sprinkler service.
2.
Do not proceed with interruption of sprinkler service without Septa's
written permission.
COORDINATION
A.
1.10
A.
Coordinate layout and installation of sprinklers with other construction that
penetrates ceilings, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, and partition
assemblies.
EXTRA MATERIALS
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
1.
Sprinkler Cabinets: Finished, wall-mounted, steel cabinet with hinged
cover, and with space for minimum of six spare sprinklers plus sprinkler
wrench. Include number of sprinklers required by NFPA 13 and sprinkler
wrench. Include separate cabinet with sprinklers and wrench for each
type of sprinkler used on Project.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PIPING MATERIALS
A.
2.2
Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe,
tube, and fitting materials, and for joining methods for specific services, service
locations, and pipe sizes.
STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
A.
Standard Weight, Galvanized Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B.
Pipe ends may be factory or field formed to match joining method.
B.
Schedule 30, Galvanized Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135; ASTM A 795/A 795M,
Type E; or ASME B36.10M, wrought steel; with wall thickness not less than
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
15037 - 4
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop and Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
Schedule 30 and not more than Schedule 40. Pipe ends may be factory or field
formed to match joining method.
C.
Thinwall Galvanized Steel Pipe:
ASTM A 135 or ASTM A 795/A 795M,
threadable, with wall thickness less than Schedule 30 and equal to or greater
than Schedule 10. Pipe ends may be factory or field formed to match joining
method.
D.
Galvanized Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53/A 53M, standardweight, seamless steel pipe with threaded ends.
E.
Galvanized, Steel Couplings: ASTM A 865, threaded.
F.
Galvanized, Gray-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Class 125, standard
pattern.
G.
Malleable- or Ductile-Iron Unions: UL 860.
H.
Cast-Iron Flanges: ASME 16.1, Class 125.
I.
Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, Class 150.
J.
Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M and ASME B16.9.
K.
Grooved-Joint, Steel-Pipe Appurtenances:
rManufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available
1.
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
Anvil International, Inc.
b.
Corcoran Piping System Co.
c.
National Fittings, Inc.
d.
Shurjoint Piping Products.
e.
Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.
f.
Victaulic Company.
2.
Pressure Rating: 175 psig or 250 psig minimum.
3.
Galvanized, Grooved-End Fittings for Steel Piping: ASTM A 47/A 47M,
malleable-iron casting or ASTM A 536, ductile-iron casting; with
dimensions matching steel pipe.
4.
Grooved-End-Pipe Couplings for Steel Piping: AWWA C606 and UL 213,
rigid pattern, unless otherwise indicated, for steel-pipe dimensions.
Include ferrous housing sections, EPDM-rubber gasket, and bolts and
nuts.
L.
Steel Pressure-Seal Fittings: UL 213, FM-approved, 175-psig pressure rating
with steel housing, rubber O-rings, and pipe stop; for use with fitting
manufacturers' pressure-seal tools.
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
15037 - 5
July 28, 2016
1.
2.3
Frazer Shop and Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements, available
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
Victaulic Company.
PIPING JOINING MATERIALS
A.
Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick or
ASME B16.21, nonmetallic and asbestos free.
1.
Class 125, Cast-Iron Flanges and Class 150, Bronze Flat-Face Flanges:
Full-face gaskets.
2.
Class 250, Cast-Iron Flanges and Class 300, Steel Raised-Face Flanges:
Ring-type gaskets.
B.
Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts:
otherwise indicated.
C.
Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus
alloys for general-duty brazing unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Welding Filler Metals:
Comply with AWS D10.12M/D10.12 for welding
materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe
being welded.
2.4
ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless
LISTED FIRE-PROTECTION VALVES
A.
General Requirements:
1.
Valves shall be UL listed and FM approved.
2.
Minimum Pressure Rating for Standard-Pressure Piping: 175 psig.
3.
Minimum Pressure Rating for High-Pressure Piping: 250 psig.
4.
All valves sprinkler valves shall be provided with SEPTA approved locks
(ABUS No.83A/45) and chains.
B.
Ball Valves:
1.
Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements, available
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
Anvil International, Inc.
b.
Victaulic Company.
2.
Standard: UL 1091 except with ball instead of disc.
3.
Valves NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends.
4.
Valves NPS 2 and NPS 2-1/2: Bronze body with threaded ends or ductileiron body with grooved ends.
5.
Valves NPS 3: Ductile-iron body with grooved ends.
C.
Bronze Butterfly Valves:
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
15037 - 6
July 28, 2016
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Frazer Shop and Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements, available
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
Fivalco Inc.
b.
Global Safety Products, Inc.
c.
Milwaukee Valve Company.
Standard: UL 1091.
Pressure Rating: 175 psig.
Body Material: Bronze.
End Connections: Threaded.
D.
Iron Butterfly Valves:
1.
Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements, available
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
Anvil International, Inc.
b.
Fivalco Inc.
c.
Global Safety Products, Inc.
d.
Kennedy Valve; a division of McWane, Inc.
e.
Milwaukee Valve Company.
f.
NIBCO INC.
g.
Pratt, Henry Company.
h.
Shurjoint Piping Products.
i.
Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.
j.
Victaulic Company.
2.
Standard: UL 1091.
3.
Pressure Rating: 175 psig.
4.
Body Material: Cast or ductile iron.
5.
Retain one of two subparagraphs below.
6.
Style: Lug or wafer.
7.
End Connections: Grooved.
E.
Check Valves:
1.
Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements, available
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
American Cast Iron Pipe Company; Waterous Company Subsidiary.
b.
Anvil International, Inc.
c.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
d.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
e.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division.
f.
Fire-End & Croker Corporation.
g.
Fire Protection Products, Inc.
h.
Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation.
i.
Kennedy Valve; a division of McWane, Inc.
j.
Metraflex, Inc.
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
15037 - 7
July 28, 2016
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Frazer Shop and Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
k.
Milwaukee Valve Company.
l.
Mueller Co.; Water Products Division.
m. NIBCO INC.
n.
Potter Roemer.
o.
Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.
p.
Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.
q.
United Brass Works, Inc.
r.
Venus Fire Protection Ltd.
s.
Victaulic Company.
t.
Viking Corporation.
u.
Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
Standard: UL 312.
Pressure Rating: 250 psig minimum.
Type: Swing check.
Body Material: Cast iron.
End Connections: Flanged or grooved.
F.
Bronze OS&Y Gate Valves:
1.
Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements, available
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
b.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division.
c.
Milwaukee Valve Company.
d.
NIBCO INC.
e.
United Brass Works, Inc.
2.
Standard: UL 262.
3.
Pressure Rating: 175 psig.
4.
Body Material: Bronze.
5.
End Connections: Threaded.
G.
Iron OS&Y Gate Valves:
1.
Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements, available
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
American Cast Iron Pipe Company; Waterous Company Subsidiary.
b.
American Valve, Inc.
c.
Clow Valve Company; a division of McWane, Inc.
d.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
e.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
f.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division.
g.
Hammond Valve.
h.
Milwaukee Valve Company.
i.
Mueller Co.; Water Products Division.
j.
NIBCO INC.
k.
Shurjoint Piping Products.
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
15037 - 8
July 28, 2016
2.
3.
4.
5.
Frazer Shop and Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
l.
Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.
m. United Brass Works, Inc.
n.
Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
Standard: UL 262.
Pressure Rating: 250 psig minimum.
Body Material: Cast or ductile iron.
End Connections: Flanged or grooved.
H.
Indicating-Type Butterfly Valves:
1.
Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements, available
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
Anvil International, Inc.
b.
Fivalco Inc.
c.
Global Safety Products, Inc.
d.
Kennedy Valve; a division of McWane, Inc.
e.
Milwaukee Valve Company.
f.
NIBCO INC.
g.
Shurjoint Piping Products.
h.
Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.
i.
Victaulic Company.
j.
Standard: UL 1091.
2.
Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum.
3.
Valves NPS 2 and Smaller:
a.
Valve Type: Ball or butterfly.
b.
Body Material: Bronze.
c.
End Connections: Threaded.
4.
Valves NPS 2-1/2 and Larger:
a.
Valve Type: Butterfly.
b.
Body Material: Cast or ductile iron.
c.
End Connections: Flanged, grooved, or wafer.
5.
Valve Operation: Integral electrical, 115-V ac, prewired, two-circuit,
supervisory switch indicating device.
I.
NRS Gate Valves:
1.
Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements, available
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
American Cast Iron Pipe Company; Waterous Company Subsidiary.
b.
American Valve, Inc.
c.
Clow Valve Company; a division of McWane, Inc.
d.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division.
e.
Kennedy Valve; a division of McWane, Inc.
f.
Mueller Co.; Water Products Division.
g.
NIBCO INC.
h.
Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
15037 - 9
July 28, 2016
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
J.
2.5
Frazer Shop and Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
Standard: UL 262.
Pressure Rating: 250 psig minimum.
Body Material: Cast iron with indicator post flange.
Stem: Nonrising.
End Connections: Flanged or grooved.
Indicator Posts:
1.
Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements, available
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
American Cast Iron Pipe Company; Waterous Company Subsidiary.
b.
American Valve, Inc.
c.
Clow Valve Company; a division of McWane, Inc.
d.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division.
e.
Kennedy Valve; a division of McWane, Inc.
f.
Mueller Co.; Water Products Division.
g.
NIBCO INC.
h.
Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.
2.
Standard: UL 789.
3.
Type: Horizontal for wall mounting.
4.
Body Material: Cast iron with extension rod and locking device.
5.
Operation: Wrench.
TRIM AND DRAIN VALVES
A.
General Requirements:
1.
Standard:
UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" listing and
"Approval Guide," published by FM Global, listing.
2.
Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum.
B.
Angle Valves:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
Fire Protection Products, Inc.
b.
United Brass Works, Inc.
C.
Ball Valves:
1.
Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements, available
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
Affiliated Distributors.
b.
Anvil International, Inc.
c.
Barnett.
d.
Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves.
e.
Fire-End & Croker Corporation.
f.
Fire Protection Products, Inc.
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
15037 - 10
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop and Yard Expansion
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
r.
s.
t.
u.
v.
Revision No. 1
Flowserve.
FNW.
Jomar International, Ltd.
Kennedy Valve; a division of McWane, Inc.
Kitz Corporation.
Legend Valve.
Metso Automation USA Inc.
Milwaukee Valve Company.
NIBCO INC.
Potter Roemer.
Red-White Valve Corporation.
Southern Manufacturing Group.
Stewart, M. A. and Sons Ltd.
Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.
Victaulic Company.
Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
D.
Globe Valves:
1.
Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements, available
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
Fire Protection Products, Inc.
b.
United Brass Works, Inc.
E.
Plug Valves:
1.
Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements, available
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
Southern Manufacturing Group.
2.6
SPECIALTY VALVES
A.
General Requirements:
1.
Standard:
UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" listing and
"Approval Guide," published by FM Global, listing.
2.
Pressure Rating:
a.
Standard-Pressure Piping Specialty Valves: 175 psig minimum.
b.
High-Pressure Piping Specialty Valves: 250 psig minimum.
3.
Body Material: Cast or ductile iron.
4.
Size: Same as connected piping.
5.
End Connections: Flanged or grooved.
B.
Automatic (Ball Drip) Drain Valves:
1.
Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements, available
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
AFAC Inc.
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
15037 - 11
July 28, 2016
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.7
A.
2.8
Frazer Shop and Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
b.
Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.
c.
Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.
Standard: UL 1726.
Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum.
Type: Automatic draining, ball check.
Size: NPS 3/4.
End Connections: Threaded.
FIRE-DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS
See Section 15038 “Fire Suppression Standpipes.”
SPRINKLER SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS
A.
Branch Outlet Fittings:
1.
Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements, available
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
Anvil International, Inc.
b.
National Fittings, Inc.
c.
Shurjoint Piping Products.
d.
Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.
e.
Victaulic Company.
2.
Standard: UL 213.
3.
Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum.
4.
Body Material: Ductile-iron housing with EPDM seals and bolts and nuts.
5.
Type: Mechanical-T and -cross fittings.
6.
Configurations: Snap-on and strapless, ductile-iron housing with branch
outlets.
7.
Size: Of dimension to fit onto sprinkler main and with outlet connections
as required to match connected branch piping.
8.
Branch Outlets: Grooved, plain-end pipe, or threaded.
B.
Flow Detection and Test Assemblies:
1.
Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements, available
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
AGF Manufacturing Inc.
b.
Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.
c.
Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.
d.
Victaulic Company.
2.
Standard:
UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" listing and
"Approval Guide," published by FM Global, listing.
3.
Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum.
4.
Body Material: Cast- or ductile-iron housing with orifice, sight glass, and
integral test valve.
5.
Size: Same as connected piping.
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
15037 - 12
July 28, 2016
6.
Frazer Shop and Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
Inlet and Outlet: Threaded.
C.
Branch Line Testers:
1.
Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements, available
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
Elkhart Brass Mfg. Company, Inc.
b.
Fire-End & Croker Corporation.
c.
Potter Roemer.
2.
Standard: UL 199.
3.
Pressure Rating: 175 psig.
4.
Body Material: Brass.
5.
Size: Same as connected piping.
6.
Inlet: Threaded.
7.
Drain Outlet: Threaded and capped.
8.
Branch Outlet: Threaded, for sprinkler.
D.
Sprinkler Inspector's Test Fittings:
1.
Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements, available
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
AGF Manufacturing Inc.
b.
Triple R Specialty.
c.
Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.
d.
Victaulic Company.
e.
Viking Corporation.
2.
Standard:
UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" listing and
"Approval Guide," published by FM Global, listing.
3.
Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum.
4.
Body Material: Cast- or ductile-iron housing with sight glass.
5.
Size: Same as connected piping.
6.
Inlet and Outlet: Threaded.
E.
Adjustable Drop Nipples:
1.
Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements, available
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
CECA, LLC.
b.
Corcoran Piping System Co.
c.
Merit Manufacturing; a division of Anvil International, Inc.
2.
Standard: UL 1474.
3.
Pressure Rating: 250 psig minimum.
4.
Body Material: Steel pipe with EPDM-rubber O-ring seals.
5.
Size: Same as connected piping.
6.
Length: Adjustable.
7.
Inlet and Outlet: Threaded.
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
15037 - 13
July 28, 2016
2.9
Frazer Shop and Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
SPRINKLERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not
limited to, the following:
1.
AFAC Inc.
2.
Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation.
3.
Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.
4.
Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.
5.
Venus Fire Protection Ltd.
6.
Victaulic Company.
7.
Viking Corporation.
B.
General Requirements:
1.
Standard:
UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" listing and
"Approval Guide," published by FM Global, listing.
2.
Pressure Rating for Residential Sprinklers: 175 psig maximum.
3.
Pressure Rating for Automatic Sprinklers: 175 psig minimum.
4.
Pressure Rating for High-Pressure Automatic Sprinklers: 250 psig
minimum.
C.
Sprinkler Finishes:
1.
Chrome plated.
2.
Bronze.
3.
Painted.
D.
Special Coatings:
1.
Wax.
2.
Lead.
3.
Corrosion-resistant paint.
E.
Sprinkler Escutcheons: Materials, types, and finishes for the following sprinkler
mounting applications. Escutcheons for concealed, flush, and recessed-type
sprinklers are specified with sprinklers.
1.
Ceiling Mounting: Chrome-plated steel, two piece, with 1-inch vertical
adjustment or Plastic, white finish, one piece, flat for flush type.
2.
Sidewall Mounting: Chrome-plated steel, one piece, flat.
F.
Sprinkler Guards:
1.
Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements, available
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.
b.
Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.
c.
Victaulic Company.
d.
Viking Corporation.
2.
Standard: UL 199.
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
15037 - 14
July 28, 2016
3.
2.10
Frazer Shop and Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
Type: Wire cage with fastening device for attaching to sprinkler.
ALARM DEVICES
A.
Alarm-device types shall match piping and equipment connections.
B.
Water-Flow Indicators:
1.
Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements, available
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
ADT Security Services, Inc.
b.
McDonnell & Miller; ITT Industries.
c.
Potter Electric Signal Company.
d.
System Sensor; a Honeywell company.
e.
Viking Corporation.
f.
Watts Industries (Canada) Inc.
2.
Standard: UL 346.
3.
Water-Flow Detector: Electrically supervised.
4.
Components: Two single-pole, double-throw circuit switches for isolated
alarm and auxiliary contacts, 7 A, 125-V ac and 0.25 A, 24-V dc; complete
with factory-set, field-adjustable retard element to prevent false signals
and tamperproof cover that sends signal if removed.
5.
Type: Paddle operated.
6.
Pressure Rating: 250 psig.
7.
Design Installation: Horizontal or vertical.
C.
Pressure Switches:
1.
Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements, available
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
AFAC Inc.
b.
Barksdale, Inc.
c.
Detroit Switch, Inc.
d.
Potter Electric Signal Company.
e.
System Sensor; a Honeywell company.
f.
Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.
g.
United Electric Controls Co.
h.
Viking Corporation.
2.
Standard: UL 346.
3.
Type: Electrically supervised water-flow switch with retard feature.
4.
Components: Single-pole, double-throw switch with normally closed
contacts.
5.
Design Operation: Rising pressure signals water flow.
D.
Valve Supervisory Switches:
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
15037 - 15
July 28, 2016
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
E.
Revision No. 1
Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements, available
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
Fire-Lite Alarms, Inc.; a Honeywell company.
b.
Kennedy Valve; a division of McWane, Inc.
c.
Potter Electric Signal Company.
d.
System Sensor; a Honeywell company.
Standard: UL 346.
Type: Electrically supervised.
Components: Single-pole, double-throw switch with normally closed
contacts.
Design: Signals that controlled valve is in other than fully open position.
Indicator-Post Supervisory Switches:
1.
Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements, available
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
Potter Electric Signal Company.
b.
System Sensor; a Honeywell company.
2.
Standard: UL 346.
3.
Type: Electrically supervised.
4.
Components: Single-pole, double-throw switch with normally closed
contacts.
5.
Design: Signals that controlled indicator-post valve is in other than fully
open position.
2.11
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Frazer Shop and Yard Expansion
PRESSURE GAGES
Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements, available
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,
but are not limited to, the following:
1.
AMETEK; U.S. Gauge Division.
2.
Ashcroft, Inc.
3.
Brecco Corporation.
4.
WIKA Instrument Corporation.
Standard: UL 393.
Dial Size: 3-1/2- to 4-1/2-inch diameter.
Pressure Gage Range: 0 to 250 psig minimum.
Water System Piping Gage: Include "WATER" or "AIR/WATER" label on dial face.
Air System Piping Gage: Include retard feature and "AIR" or "AIR/WATER" label
on dial face.
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
15037 - 16
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop and Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Perform fire-hydrant flow test according to NFPA 13 and NFPA 291. Use
results for system design calculations required in "Quality Assurance" Article.
B.
Report test results promptly and in writing.
3.2
SERVICE-ENTRANCE PIPING
A.
Connect sprinkler piping to water-service piping for service entrance to building.
Comply with requirements for exterior piping in Section 15035 "Facility FireSuppression Water-Service Piping."
B.
Install shutoff valve, backflow preventer, pressure gage, drain, and other
accessories indicated at connection to water-service piping.
C.
Install shutoff valve, check valve, pressure gage, and drain at connection to
water service.
3.3
PIPING INSTALLATION
A.
Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams
indicate general location and arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated,
as far as practical.
1.
Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written approval
from authorities having jurisdiction. File written approval with Architect
before deviating from approved working plans.
B.
Piping Standard: Comply with requirements for installation of sprinkler piping in
NFPA 13.
C.
Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements for seismicrestraint device materials and installation in NFPA 13.
D.
Use listed fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains,
and reductions in pipe sizes.
E.
Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 and smaller.
F.
Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves,
apparatus, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2 and larger end connections.
G.
Install "Inspector's Test Connections" in sprinkler system piping, complete with
shutoff valve, and sized and located according to NFPA 13.
H.
Install sprinkler piping with drains for complete system drainage.
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
15037 - 17
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop and Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
I.
Install sprinkler control valves, test assemblies, and drain risers adjacent to
standpipes when sprinkler piping is connected to standpipes.
J.
Install automatic (ball drip) drain valve at each check valve for fire-department
connection, to drain piping between fire-department connection and check
valve. Install drain piping to spill outside building.
K.
Install alarm devices in piping systems.
L.
Install hangers and supports for sprinkler system piping according to NFPA 13.
Comply with requirements for hanger materials in NFPA 13.
M.
Install pressure gages on riser or feed main, at each sprinkler test connection,
and at top of each standpipe. Include pressure gages with connection not less
than NPS 1/4 and with soft metal seated globe valve, arranged for draining pipe
between gage and valve. Install gages to permit removal, and install where
they will not be subject to freezing.
N.
Fill sprinkler system piping with water.
O.
Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with
requirements for sleeves specified in Section 15030 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals
for Fire-Suppression Piping."
P.
Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply
with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 15030 "Sleeves and
Sleeve Seals for Fire-Suppression Piping."
Q.
Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply
with requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 15031 "Escutcheons for
Fire-Suppression Piping."
3.4
JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A.
Install couplings, flanges, flanged fittings, unions, nipples, and transition and
special fittings that have finish and pressure ratings same as or higher than
system's pressure rating for aboveground applications unless otherwise
indicated.
B.
Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 and smaller.
C.
Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves,
apparatus, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2 and larger end connections.
D.
Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel
pipe.
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
15037 - 18
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop and Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
E.
Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes,
and fittings before assembly.
F.
Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material in size, type, and thickness
suitable for water service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to
ASME B31.9.
G.
Threaded Joints:
Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to
ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded
pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as
follows:
1.
Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads.
2.
Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are
corroded or damaged.
H.
Twist-Locked Joints: Insert plain end of steel pipe into plain-end-pipe fitting.
Rotate retainer lugs one-quarter turn or tighten retainer pin.
I.
Steel-Piping, Pressure-Sealed Joints: Join lightwall steel pipe and steel
pressure-seal fittings with tools recommended by fitting manufacturer.
J.
Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12M/D10.12, using
qualified processes and welding operators according to "Quality Assurance"
Article.
1.
Shop weld pipe joints where welded piping is indicated. Do not use
welded joints for galvanized-steel pipe.
K.
Steel-Piping, Cut-Grooved Joints: Cut square-edge groove in end of pipe
according to AWWA C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant,
and bolts. Join steel pipe and grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606
for steel-pipe joints.
L.
Steel-Piping, Roll-Grooved Joints: Roll rounded-edge groove in end of pipe
according to AWWA C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant,
and bolts. Join steel pipe and grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606
for steel-pipe grooved joints.
M.
Steel-Piping, Pressure-Sealed Joints: Join Schedule 5 steel pipe and steel
pressure-seal fittings with tools recommended by fitting manufacturer.
N.
Brazed Joints: Join copper tube and fittings according to CDA's "Copper Tube
Handbook," "Brazed Joints" Chapter.
O.
Copper-Tubing Grooved Joints: Roll rounded-edge groove in end of tube
according to AWWA C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant,
and bolts. Join copper tube and grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606
for steel-pipe grooved joints.
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
15037 - 19
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop and Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
P.
Copper-Tubing, Pressure-Sealed Joints:
Join copper tube and copper
pressure-seal fittings with tools recommended by fitting manufacturer.
Q.
Extruded-Tee Connections:
Form tee in copper tube according to
ASTM F 2014. Use tool designed for copper tube; drill pilot hole, form collar for
outlet, dimple tube to form seating stop, and braze branch tube into collar.
R.
Dissimilar-Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with
materials of both piping systems.
3.5
VALVE AND SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION
A.
Install listed fire-protection valves, trim and drain valves, specialty valves and
trim, controls, and specialties according to NFPA 13 and authorities having
jurisdiction.
B.
Install listed fire-protection shutoff valves supervised open, located to control
sources of water supply except from fire-department connections. Install
permanent identification signs indicating portion of system controlled by each
valve.
C.
Install check valve in each water-supply connection. Install backflow preventers
instead of check valves in potable-water-supply sources.
D.
Specialty Valves:
1.
General Requirements: Install in vertical position for proper direction of
flow, in main supply to system.
2.
Alarm Valves: Include bypass check valve and retarding chamber drainline connection.
3.6
SPRINKLER INSTALLATION
A.
Install sprinklers in suspended ceilings in center of narrow dimension of
acoustical ceiling panels.
B.
Install dry-type sprinklers with water supply from heated space. Do not install
pendent or sidewall, wet-type sprinklers in areas subject to freezing.
C.
Install sprinklers into flexible, sprinkler hose fittings and install hose into bracket
on ceiling grid.
3.7
FIRE-DEPARTMENT CONNECTION INSTALLATION
A.
See Section 15038 “Fire Suppression Standpipes.”
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
15037 - 20
July 28, 2016
3.8
Frazer Shop and Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to
requirements in NFPA 13.
B.
Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals.
requirements for identification specified in Division 16.
3.9
Comply with
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform tests and inspections.
B.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
Leak Test: After installation, charge systems and test for leaks. Repair
leaks and retest until no leaks exist.
2.
Test and adjust controls and safeties.
Replace damaged and
malfunctioning controls and equipment.
3.
Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler systems according to NFPA 13,
"Systems Acceptance" Chapter.
4.
Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices.
5.
Coordinate with fire-alarm tests. Operate as required.
6.
Coordinate with fire-pump tests. Operate as required.
7.
Verify that equipment hose threads are same as local fire-department
equipment.
C.
Sprinkler piping system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and
inspections.
D.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.10
CLEANING
A.
Clean dirt and debris from sprinklers.
B.
Remove and replace sprinklers with paint other than factory finish.
3.11
A.
3.12
A.
DEMONSTRATION
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Septa's
maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain specialty valves and
pressure-maintenance pumps.
PIPING SCHEDULE
Piping between Fire-Department Connections and Check Valves: Galvanized,
standard-weight steel pipe with threaded ends; cast-iron threaded fittings; and
threaded joints.
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
15037 - 21
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop and Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
B.
Sprinkler specialty fittings may be used, downstream of control valves, instead
of specified fittings.
C.
Copper-tube, extruded-tee connections may be used for tee branches in copper
tubing instead of specified copper fittings. Branch-connection joints must be
brazed.
D.C. Standard-pressure, wet-pipe sprinkler system, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be one
of the following:
1.
Standard-weight, black-steel pipe with threaded ends; uncoated, gray-iron
threaded fittings; and threaded joints.
2.1. Standard-weight, galvanized-steel pipe with threaded ends; galvanized,
gray-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints.
3.
Standard-weight, black-steel pipe with cut or roll grooved ends; uncoated,
grooved-end fittings for steel piping; grooved-end-pipe couplings for steel
piping; and grooved joints.
4.2. Standard-weight, galvanized-steel pipe with cut-grooved ends; galvanized,
grooved-end fittings for steel piping; grooved-end-pipe couplings for steel
piping; and grooved joints.
E.D. Standard-pressure, wet-pipe sprinkler system, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4, shall
be one of the following:
1.
Standard-weight black-steel pipe with threaded ends; uncoated, gray-iron
threaded fittings; and threaded joints.
2.1. Standard-weight, galvanized-steel pipe with threaded ends; galvanized,
gray-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints.
3.
Standard-weight, black-steel pipe with cut or roll grooved ends; uncoated,
grooved-end fittings for steel piping; grooved-end-pipe couplings for steel
piping; and grooved joints.
4.2. Standard-weight, galvanized-steel pipe with cut-grooved ends; galvanized,
grooved-end fittings for steel piping; grooved-end-pipe couplings for steel
piping; and grooved joints.
5.
Schedule 10, black-steel pipe with roll-grooved ends; uncoated, groovedend fittings for steel piping; grooved-end-pipe couplings for steel piping;
and grooved joints (only where specified).
F.E. Standard-pressure, wet-pipe sprinkler system, NPS 5 and larger, shall be one
of the following:
1.
Standard-weight, black-steel pipe with threaded ends; uncoated, gray-iron
threaded fittings; and threaded joints.
2.1. Standard-weight, galvanized-steel pipe with threaded ends; galvanized,
gray-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints.
3.
Standard-weight, black-steel pipe with cut or roll grooved ends; uncoated,
grooved-end fittings for steel piping; grooved-end-pipe couplings for steel
piping; and grooved joints.
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
15037 - 22
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop and Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
4.2. Standard-weight, galvanized-steel pipe with cut-grooved ends; galvanized,
grooved-end fittings for steel piping; grooved-end-pipe couplings for steel
piping; and grooved joints.
5.
Schedule 10, black-steel pipe with roll-grooved ends; uncoated, groovedend fittings for steel piping; grooved-end-pipe couplings for steel piping;
and grooved joints. (only where specified)
3.13
SPRINKLER SCHEDULE
A.
Use sprinkler types in subparagraphs below for the following applications: as
indicated on drawings
B.
Provide sprinkler types in subparagraphs below with finishes indicated.
1.
Flush Sprinklers: Bright chrome, with painted white escutcheon.
2.
Recessed Sprinklers: Bright chrome, with bright chrome escutcheon.
3.
Upright, Pendant and Sprinklers: Chrome plated in finished spaces
exposed to view; rough bronze in unfinished spaces not exposed to view;
wax coated where exposed to acids, chemicals, or other corrosive fumes.
END OF SECTION
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
15037 - 23
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop and Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
SECTION 15038
FIRE-SUPPRESSION STANDPIPES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
1.3
Pipes, fittings, and specialties.
Fire-protection valves.
Hose connections.
Fire-department connections.
Alarm devices.
Pressure gages.
Section 15037 "Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems" for wet-pipe sprinkler piping.
Section 16722 " Fire-Alarm System" for alarm devices not specified in this
Section.
DEFINITIONS
A.
High-Pressure Standpipe Piping: Fire-suppression standpipe piping designed
to operate at working pressure higher than standard 175 psig, but not higher
than 300 psig.
B.
Standard-Pressure Standpipe Piping:
Fire-suppression standpipe piping
designed to operate at working pressure 175 psig maximum.
1.4
A.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS
Automatic Wet-Type, Class I Standpipe System: Includes NPS 2-1/2 hose
connections. Has open water-supply valve with pressure maintained and is
capable of supplying water demand.
FIRE-SUPPRESSION STANDPIPES
15038 - 1
July 28, 2016
1.5
Frazer Shop and Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Standard-Pressure, Fire-Suppression Standpipe System Component: Listed for
175-psig minimum working pressure.
B.
Delegated Design:
Design fire-suppression standpipes, including
comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using
performance requirements and design criteria indicated.
1.6
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities,
operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties
and accessories.
B.
Shop Drawings: For fire-suppression standpipes. Include plans, elevations,
sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1.
C.
1.7
A.
Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
Delegated-Design Submittal: For standpipe systems indicated to comply with
performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed
and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their
preparation.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
Coordination Drawings: Fire-suppression standpipes, drawn to scale, on which
the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from
installers of the items involved:
1.
2.
3.
Domestic water piping.
Compressed air piping.
HVAC hydronic piping.
B.
Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and professional engineer.
C.
Approved Standpipe Drawings:
Working plans, prepared according to
NFPA 14, that have been approved by authorities having jurisdiction, including
hydraulic calculations if applicable.
D.
Welding certificates.
E.
Fire-hydrant flow test report.
F.
Field Test Reports and Certificates: Indicate and interpret test results for
compliance with performance requirements and as described in NFPA 14.
FIRE-SUPPRESSION STANDPIPES
15038 - 2
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop and Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
Include "Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping" and
"Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Underground Piping."
G.
1.8
A.
1.9
A.
Field quality-control reports.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire-suppression standpipes specialties
to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Installer Qualifications:
1.
Installer's responsibilities include designing, fabricating, and installing firesuppression standpipes and providing professional engineering services
needed to assume engineering responsibility. Base calculations on
results of fire-hydrant flow test.
a.
Engineering Responsibility:
Preparation of working plans,
calculations, and field test reports by a qualified professional
engineer.
B.
Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
C.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as
defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended
location and application.
D.
NFPA Standards:
Fire-suppression standpipe equipment, specialties,
accessories, installation, and testing shall comply with NFPA 14, "Installation of
Standpipe and Hose Systems."
1.10
A.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Interruption of Existing Fire-Suppression Standpipe Service: Do not interrupt
fire-suppression standpipe service to facilities occupied by Owner or others
unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to
provide temporary fire-suppression standpipe service according to requirements
indicated:
1.
2.
Notify Architect and Owner no fewer than two days in advance of
proposed interruption of fire-suppression standpipe service.
Do not proceed with interruption of fire-suppression standpipe service
without Architect's or Owner's written permission.
FIRE-SUPPRESSION STANDPIPES
15038 - 3
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop and Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
2.2
PIPING MATERIALS
Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe,
tube, and fitting materials, and for joining methods for specific services, service
locations, and pipe sizes.
STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
A.
Standard Weight, Galvanized -Steel Pipe:
ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E,
Grade B. Pipe ends may be factory or field formed to match joining method.
B.
Schedule 30, Galvanized -Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135; ASTM A 795/A 795M,
Type E; or ASME B36.10M, wrought steel; with wall thickness not less than
Schedule 30 and not more than Schedule 40. Pipe ends may be factory or field
formed to match joining method.
C.
Thinwall Galvanized -Steel Pipe:
ASTM A 135 or ASTM A 795/A 795M,
threadable, with wall thickness less than Schedule 30 and equal to or greater
than Schedule 10. Pipe ends may be factory or field formed to match joining
method.
D.
Standard-Weight, Galvanized- -Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of
ASTM A 53/A 53M, seamless steel pipe with threaded ends.
E.
Galvanized, Steel Couplings: ASTM A 865, threaded.
F.
Galvanized, Gray-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Class 125, standard
pattern.
G.
Malleable- or Ductile-Iron Unions: UL 860.
H.
Cast-Iron Flanges: ASME B16.1, Class 125.
I.
Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, Class 150.
J.
Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M and ASME B16.9.
K.
Grooved-Joint, Steel-Pipe Appurtenances:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products
by one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
Anvil International, Inc.
Corcoran Piping System Co.
National Fittings, Inc.
FIRE-SUPPRESSION STANDPIPES
15038 - 4
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop and Yard Expansion
d.
e.
f.
2.
3.
4.
2.3
Revision No. 1
Shurjoint Piping Products.
Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.
Victaulic Company.
Pressure Rating: 250 psig minimum.
Galvanized, Grooved-End Fittings for Steel Piping: ASTM A 47/A 47M,
malleable-iron casting or ASTM A 536, ductile-iron casting; with
dimensions matching steel pipe.
Grooved-End-Pipe Couplings for Steel Piping: AWWA C606 and UL 213,
rigid pattern, unless otherwise indicated, for steel-pipe dimensions.
Include ferrous housing sections, EPDM-rubber gasket, and bolts and
nuts.
COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS
A.
Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L and ASTM B 88, Type M water tube,
drawn temper.
B.
Cast-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18, pressure fittings.
C.
Wrought-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, pressure fittings.
D.
Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends.
E.
Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with
ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded
ends.
F.
Grooved-Joint, Copper-Tube Appurtenances:
1.
Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products by one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
2.4
A.
Anvil International, Inc.
Shurjoint Piping Products.
Victaulic Company.
Grooved-End, Copper Fittings: ASTM B 75, copper tube or ASTM B 584,
bronze castings.
Grooved-End-Tube Couplings: To fit copper tube dimensions, with design
similar to AWWA C606. Include ferrous housing sections, EPDM-rubber
gasket suitable for hot and cold water, and bolts and nuts.
PIPING JOINING MATERIALS
Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick.
FIRE-SUPPRESSION STANDPIPES
15038 - 5
July 28, 2016
1.
2.
Frazer Shop and Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
Class 125, Cast-Iron Flanges and Class 150, Bronze Flat-Face Flanges:
Full-face gaskets.
Class 250, Cast-Iron Flanges and Class 300, Steel Raised-Face Flanges:
Ring-type gaskets.
B.
Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts:
otherwise indicated.
C.
Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus
alloys for general-duty brazing unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Welding Filler Metals:
Comply with AWS D10.12M/D10.12 for welding
materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe
being welded.
2.5
A.
LISTED FIRE-PROTECTION VALVES
General Requirements:
1.
2.
B.
Valves shall be UL listed and FM approved.
Minimum Pressure Rating for Standard-Pressure Piping: 175 psig.
Ball Valves:
1.
Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products by one of the following:
a.
b.
2.
3.
4.
C.
ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless
Anvil International, Inc.
Victaulic Company.
Standard: UL 1091 except with ball instead of disc.
Valves NPS 2 and NPS 2-1/2: Bronze body with threaded ends or ductileiron body with grooved ends.
Valves NPS 3: Ductile-iron body with grooved ends.
Bronze Butterfly Valves:
1.
Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products by one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
Fivalco Inc.
Global Safety Products, Inc.
Milwaukee Valve Company.
Standard: UL 1091.
Pressure Rating: 175 psig.
Body Material: Bronze.
FIRE-SUPPRESSION STANDPIPES
15038 - 6
July 28, 2016
5.
D.
Frazer Shop and Yard Expansion
End Connections: Threaded.
Iron Butterfly Valves:
1.
Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products by one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
E.
Revision No. 1
Anvil International, Inc.
Fivalco Inc.
Global Safety Products, Inc.
Kennedy Valve; a division of McWane, Inc.
Milwaukee Valve Company.
NIBCO INC.
Pratt, Henry Company.
Shurjoint Piping Products.
Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.
Victaulic Company.
Standard: UL 1091.
Pressure Rating: 175 psig.
Body Material: Cast or ductile iron.
Style: Lug or wafer.
End Connections: Grooved.
Check Valves:
1.
Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products by one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
r.
AFAC Inc.
American Cast Iron Pipe Company; Waterous Company Subsidiary.
Anvil International, Inc.
Clow Valve Company; a division of McWane, Inc.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division.
Fire-End & Croker Corporation.
Fire Protection Products, Inc.
Fivalco Inc.
Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation.
Groeniger & Company.
Kennedy Valve; a division of McWane, Inc.
Matco-Norca.
Metraflex, Inc.
Milwaukee Valve Company.
Mueller Co.; Water Products Division.
NIBCO INC.
FIRE-SUPPRESSION STANDPIPES
15038 - 7
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop and Yard Expansion
s.
t.
u.
v.
w.
x.
y.
z.
aa.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
F.
Potter Roemer.
Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.
Shurjoint Piping Products.
Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.
United Brass Works, Inc.
Venus Fire Protection Ltd.
Victaulic Company.
Viking Corporation.
Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
Standard: UL 312.
Pressure Rating: 300 psig.
Type: Swing check.
Body Material: Cast iron.
End Connections: Flanged or grooved.
Bronze OS&Y Gate Valves:
1.
Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products by one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
3.
4.
5.
G.
Revision No. 1
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division.
Milwaukee Valve Company.
NIBCO INC.
United Brass Works, Inc.
Standard: UL 262.
Pressure Rating: 175 psig.
Body Material: Bronze.
End Connections: Threaded.
Iron OS&Y Gate Valves:
1.
Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products by one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
American Cast Iron Pipe Company; Waterous Company Subsidiary.
American Valve, Inc.
Clow Valve Company; a division of McWane, Inc.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division.
Hammond Valve.
Milwaukee Valve Company.
Mueller Co.; Water Products Division.
NIBCO INC.
Shurjoint Piping Products.
FIRE-SUPPRESSION STANDPIPES
15038 - 8
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop and Yard Expansion
l.
m.
n.
2.
3.
4.
5.
H.
Standard: UL 262.
Pressure Rating: 300 psig.
Body Material: Cast or ductile iron.
End Connections: Flanged or grooved.
Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products by one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Valve Type: Ball or butterfly.
Body Material: Bronze.
End Connections: Threaded.
Valves NPS 2-1/2 and Larger:
a.
b.
c.
6.
Anvil International, Inc.
Fivalco Inc.
Global Safety Products, Inc.
Kennedy Valve; a division of McWane, Inc.
Milwaukee Valve Company.
NIBCO INC.
Shurjoint Piping Products.
Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.
Victaulic Company.
Standard: UL 1091.
Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum.
Valves NPS 2 and Smaller:
a.
b.
c.
A.
Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.
United Brass Works, Inc.
Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
Indicating-Type Butterfly Valves:
1.
2.6
Revision No. 1
Valve Type: Butterfly.
Body Material: Cast or ductile iron.
End Connections: Flanged, grooved, or wafer.
Valve Operation: Integral electrical, 115-V ac, prewired, two-circuit,
supervisory switch visual indicating device.
TRIM AND DRAIN VALVES
General Requirements:
1.
Standard:
UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" listing and
"Approval Guide," published by FM Global, listing.
FIRE-SUPPRESSION STANDPIPES
15038 - 9
July 28, 2016
2.
B.
Frazer Shop and Yard Expansion
Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum.
Angle Valves:
1.
Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products by one of the following:
a.
b.
C.
Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products by one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
r.
s.
t.
u.
v.
Affiliated Distributors.
Anvil International, Inc.
Barnett.
Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves.
Fire-End & Croker Corporation.
Fire Protection Products, Inc.
Flowserve.
FNW.
Jomar International, Ltd.
Kennedy Valve; a division of McWane, Inc.
Kitz Corporation.
Legend Valve.
Metso Automation USA Inc.
Milwaukee Valve Company.
NIBCO INC.
Potter Roemer.
Red-White Valve Corporation.
Southern Manufacturing Group.
Stewart, M. A. and Sons Ltd.
Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.
Victaulic Company.
Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
Globe Valves:
1.
Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products by one of the following:
a.
b.
E.
Fire Protection Products, Inc.
United Brass Works, Inc.
Ball Valves:
1.
D.
Revision No. 1
Fire Protection Products, Inc.
United Brass Works, Inc.
Plug Valves:
FIRE-SUPPRESSION STANDPIPES
15038 - 10
July 28, 2016
1.
Frazer Shop and Yard Expansion
Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements, available
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
2.7
A.
Southern Manufacturing Group.
SPECIALTY VALVES
General Requirements:
1.
2.
Standard:
UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" listing and
"Approval Guide," published by FM Global, listing.
Pressure Rating:
a.
b.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Revision No. 1
Standard-Pressure Piping Specialty Valves: 175 psig minimum.
High-Pressure Piping Specialty Valves: 300 psig.
Body Material: Cast or ductile iron.
Size: Same as connected piping.
End Connections: Flanged or grooved.
Pressure-Reducing Valves:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements and basis of
design product under #9, provide products by one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
AFAC Inc.
Elkhart Brass Mfg. Company, Inc.
Fire-End & Croker Corporation.
Fire Protection Products, Inc.
GMR International Equipment Corporation.
Guardian Fire Equipment, Inc.
Potter Roemer.
Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.
Wilson & Cousins Inc.
Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products
Division.
UL 668 hose valve, with integral UL 1468 reducing device.
Pressure Rating: 300 psig minimum.
Material: Brass or bronze.
Inlet: Female pipe threads.
Outlet: Threaded with or without adapter having male hose threads.
Pattern: Angle or gate.
Finish: Rough brass or bronze.
Model basis of design: Potter Roemer Model 4033
FIRE-SUPPRESSION STANDPIPES
15038 - 11
July 28, 2016
C.
Frazer Shop and Yard Expansion
Automatic (Ball Drip) Drain Valves:
1.
Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products by one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.8
A.
Revision No. 1
AFAC Inc.
Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.
Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.
Standard: UL 1726.
Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum.
Type: Automatic draining, ball check.
Size: NPS 3/4.
End Connections: Threaded.
HOSE CONNECTIONS
Adjustable-Valve Hose Connections:
1.
Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products by one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
AFAC Inc.
Elkhart Brass Mfg. Company, Inc.
Fire-End & Croker Corporation.
Fire Protection Products, Inc.
GMR International Equipment Corporation.
Guardian Fire Equipment, Inc.
Potter Roemer.
Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.
Wilson & Cousins Inc.
Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products
Division.
Standard:
UL 668 hose valve, with integral UL 1468 reducing or
restricting pressure-control device, for connecting fire hose.
Pressure Rating: 300 psig minimum.
Material: Brass or bronze.
Size: NPS 2-1/2 , as indicated.
Inlet: Female pipe threads.
Outlet: Male hose threads with lugged cap, gasket, and chain. Include
hose valve threads according to NFPA 1963 and matching local firedepartment threads.
Pattern: Angle or gate.
Pressure-Control Device Type: Pressure reducing.
Design Outlet Pressure Setting: see drawings.
Finish: Rough brass or bronze.
FIRE-SUPPRESSION STANDPIPES
15038 - 12
July 28, 2016
2.9
A.
Revision No. 1
FIRE-DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS
Fire-Department Connection (verify with Fire Dept.):
1.
Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products by one of the following:
a.
Guardian Fire Equipment, Inc. – Storz Fire Dept. Connection
b.
Or SEPTA approved equal
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Standard: UL 405.
Type: Exposed, projecting, for wall mounting.
Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum.
Body Material: Corrosion-resistant metal.
Inlets: Aluminum with threads according to NFPA 1963 and matching
local fire-department sizes and threads. Include extension pipe nipples,
brass lugged swivel connections, and check devices or clappers.
Caps: Aluminum, lugged type, with gasket and chain.
Escutcheon Plate: Round, brass, wall type.
Outlet: Back, with pipe threads.
Number of Inlets: One-5” with two lock safety tabs
Escutcheon Plate Marking: Similar to "AUTO SPKR & STANDPIPE."
Finish: Rough brass or bronze or Rough chrome plated.
Outlet Size: NPS 4.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
2.10
Frazer Shop and Yard Expansion
ALARM DEVICES
A.
Alarm-device types shall match piping and equipment connections.
B.
Water-Flow Indicators:
1.
Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products by one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.
3.
4.
5.
ADT Security Services, Inc.
McDonnell & Miller; ITT Industries.
Potter Electric Signal Company.
System Sensor; a Honeywell company.
Viking Corporation.
Watts Industries (Canada) Inc.
Standard: UL 346.
Water-Flow Detector: Electrically supervised.
Components: Two single-pole, double-throw circuit switches for isolated
alarm and auxiliary contacts, 7 A, 125-V ac and 0.25 A, 24-V dc; complete
with factory-set, field-adjustable retard element to prevent false signals
and tamperproof cover that sends signal if removed.
Type: Paddle operated.
FIRE-SUPPRESSION STANDPIPES
15038 - 13
July 28, 2016
6.
7.
C.
Frazer Shop and Yard Expansion
Pressure Rating: 250 psig.
Design Installation: Horizontal or vertical.
Pressure Switches:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products
by one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
AFAC Inc.
Barksdale, Inc.
Detroit Switch, Inc.
Potter Electric Signal Company.
System Sensor; a Honeywell company.
Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.
United Electric Controls Co.
Viking Corporation.
Standard: UL 346.
Type: Electrically supervised water-flow switch with retard feature.
Components: Single-pole, double-throw switch with normally closed
contacts.
Design Operation: Rising pressure signals water flow.
Valve Supervisory Switches:
1.
Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products by one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
4.
5.
E.
Revision No. 1
Fire-Lite Alarms, Inc.; a Honeywell company.
Kennedy Valve; a division of McWane, Inc.
Potter Electric Signal Company.
System Sensor; a Honeywell company.
Standard: UL 346.
Type: Electrically supervised.
Components: Single-pole, double-throw switch with normally closed
contacts.
Design: Signals that controlled valve is in other than fully open position.
Indicator-Post Supervisory Switches:
1.
Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products by one of the following:
a.
b.
2.
Potter Electric Signal Company.
System Sensor; a Honeywell company.
Standard: UL 346.
FIRE-SUPPRESSION STANDPIPES
15038 - 14
July 28, 2016
3.
4.
5.
2.11
A.
Frazer Shop and Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
Type: Electrically supervised.
Components: Single-pole, double-throw switch with normally closed
contacts.
Design: Signals that controlled indicator-post valve is in other than fully
open position.
PRESSURE GAGES
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
AMETEK; U.S. Gauge Division.
Ashcroft Inc.
Brecco Corporation.
WIKA Instrument Corporation.
B.
Standard: UL 393.
C.
Dial Size: 3-1/2- to 4-1/2-inch diameter.
D.
Pressure Gage Range: 0 to 300 psig.
E.
Water System Piping Gage: Include "WATER" or "AIR/WATER" label on dial
face.
F.
Air System Piping Gage: Include retard feature and "AIR" or "AIR/WATER"
label on dial face.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Perform fire-hydrant flow test according to NFPA 14 and NFPA 291. Use
results for system design calculations required in "Quality Assurance" Article.
B.
Report test results promptly and in writing.
3.2
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine roughing-in for hose connections and stations to verify actual locations
of piping connections before installation.
B.
Examine walls and partitions for suitable thickness, fire- and smoke-rated
construction, framing for hose-station cabinets, and other conditions where
hose connections and stations are to be installed.
FIRE-SUPPRESSION STANDPIPES
15038 - 15
July 28, 2016
C.
3.3
Frazer Shop and Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
SERVICE-ENTRANCE PIPING
A.
Connect fire-suppression standpipe piping to water-service piping at service
entrance into building. Comply with requirements for exterior piping in
Section 15035 "Facility Fire-Suppression Water-Service Piping."
B.
Install shutoff valve, backflow preventer, pressure gage, drain, and other
accessories at connection to fire-suppression water-service piping.
C.
Install shutoff valve, check valve, pressure gage, and drain at connection to
water service.
3.4
A.
PIPING INSTALLATION
Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams
indicate general location and arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated,
as far as practical.
1.
Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written approval
from authorities having jurisdiction. File written approval with Architect
before deviating from approved working plans.
B.
Piping Standard: Comply with requirements in NFPA 14 for installation of firesuppression standpipe piping.
C.
Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements in NFPA 13 for
seismic-restraint device materials and installation.
D.
Install listed fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains,
and reductions in pipe sizes.
E.
Install drain valves on standpipes. Extend drain piping to outside of building.
F.
Install automatic (ball drip) drain valves to drain piping between fire-department
connections and check valves. Drain to floor drain or outside building.
G.
Install alarm devices in piping systems.
H.
Install hangers and supports for standpipe system piping according to NFPA 14.
Comply with requirements in NFPA 13 for hanger materials.
I.
Install pressure gages on riser or feed main and at top of each standpipe.
Include pressure gages with connection not less than NPS 1/4 and with softmetal seated globe valve, arranged for draining pipe between gage and valve.
FIRE-SUPPRESSION STANDPIPES
15038 - 16
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop and Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
Install gages to permit removal, and install where they will not be subject to
freezing.
J.
Drain dry-type standpipe system piping.
K.
Pressurize and check dry-type standpipe system piping and air-pressure
maintenance devices.
L.
Fill wet-type standpipe system piping with water.
M.
Connect compressed-air supply to dry-pipe sprinkler piping.
N.
Connect air compressor to the following piping and wiring:
1.
2.
3.
Pressure gages and controls.
Electrical power system.
Fire-alarm devices, including low-pressure alarm.
O.
Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with
requirements for sleeves specified in Section 15030 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals
for Fire-Suppression Piping."
P.
Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply
with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 15030 "Sleeves and
Sleeve Seals for Fire-Suppression Piping."
Q.
Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply
with requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 15031 "Escutcheons for
Fire-Suppression Piping."
3.5
JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A.
Install couplings, flanges, flanged fittings, unions, nipples, and transition and
special fittings that have finish and pressure ratings same as or higher than
system's pressure rating for aboveground applications unless otherwise
indicated.
B.
Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 and smaller.
C.
Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves,
apparatus, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2 and larger end connections.
D.
Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel
pipe.
E.
Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes,
and fittings before assembly.
FIRE-SUPPRESSION STANDPIPES
15038 - 17
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop and Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
F.
Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material in size, type, and thickness
suitable for water service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to
ASME B31.9.
G.
Threaded Joints:
Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to
ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded
pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as
follows:
1.
2.
Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads.
Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are
corroded or damaged.
H.
Steel-Piping, Cut-Grooved Joints: Cut square-edge groove in end of pipe
according to AWWA C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant,
and bolts. Join steel pipe and grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606
for steel-pipe joints.
I.
Steel-Piping, Roll-Grooved Joints: Roll rounded-edge groove in end of pipe
according to AWWA C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant,
and bolts. Join steel pipe and grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606
for steel-pipe grooved joints.
J.
Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12M/D10.12, using
qualified processes and welding operators according to "Quality Assurance"
Article.
1.
Shop weld pipe joints where welded piping is indicated.
welded joints for galvanized-steel pipe.
Do not use
K.
Brazed Joints: Join copper tube and fittings according to CDA's "Copper Tube
Handbook," "Brazed Joints" Chapter.
L.
Copper-Tubing Grooved Joints: Roll rounded-edge groove in end of tube
according to AWWA C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant,
and bolts. Join copper tube and grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606
for steel-pipe grooved joints.
M.
Dissimilar-Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with
materials of both piping systems.
3.6
A.
VALVE AND SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION
Install listed fire-protection valves, trim and drain valves, specialty valves and
trim, controls, and specialties according to NFPA 14 and authorities having
jurisdiction.
FIRE-SUPPRESSION STANDPIPES
15038 - 18
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop and Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
B.
Install listed fire-protection shutoff valves supervised-open, located to control
sources of water supply except from fire-department connections. Install
permanent identification signs indicating portion of system controlled by each
valve.
C.
Install check valve in each water-supply connection. Install backflow preventers
instead of check valves in potable-water-supply sources.
D.
Specialty Valves:
1.
2.
3.
General Requirements: Install in vertical position for proper direction of
flow, in main supply to system.
Alarm Valves: Install bypass check valve and retarding chamber drainline connection.
Dry-Pipe Valves: Install trim sets for air supply, drain, priming level, alarm
connections, ball drip valves, pressure gages, priming chamber
attachment, and fill-line attachment.
a.
b.
c.
3.7
Install air compressor and compressed-air supply piping.
Air-Pressure Maintenance Device: Install shutoff valves to permit
servicing without shutting down sprinkler system; bypass valve for
quick system filling; pressure regulator or switch to maintain system
pressure; strainer; pressure ratings with 14- to 60-psig adjustable
range; and 175-psig maximum inlet pressure.
Install compressed-air supply piping from building's compressed-air
piping system.
HOSE-CONNECTION INSTALLATION
A.
Install hose connections adjacent to standpipes.
B.
Install freestanding hose connections for access and minimum passage
restriction.
C.
Install NPS 2-1/2 hose connections with quick-disconnect NPS 2-1/2 by NPS 11/2 reducer adapter and flow-restricting device.
D.
Install wall-mounted-type hose connections in cabinets.
Include pipe
escutcheons, with finish matching valves, inside cabinet where water-supply
piping penetrates cabinet. Install valves at angle required for connection of fire
hose.
Comply with requirements for cabinets in Section 10522 "Fire
Extinguishers, Cabinets and Accessories."
3.8
A.
HOSE-STATION INSTALLATION
Install freestanding hose stations for access and minimum passage restriction.
FIRE-SUPPRESSION STANDPIPES
15038 - 19
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop and Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
B.
Install NPS 1-1/2 hose-station valves with flow-restricting device unless
otherwise indicated.
C.
Install NPS 2-1/2 hose connections with quick-disconnect NPS 2-1/2 by NPS 11/2 reducer adapter and flow-restricting device unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Install freestanding hose stations with support or bracket attached to standpipe.
E.
Install wall-mounted, rack hose stations in cabinets. Include pipe escutcheons,
with finish matching valves, inside cabinet where water-supply piping
penetrates cabinet. Install valves at angle required for connection of fire hose.
Comply with requirements for cabinets in Section 10522 "Fire Extinguishers,
Cabinets and Accessories."
F.
Install hose-reel hose stations on wall with bracket.
3.9
A.
3.10
MONITOR INSTALLATION
Install monitors on standpipe piping.
FIRE-DEPARTMENT CONNECTION INSTALLATION
A.
Install wall-type, fire-department connections.
B.
Install automatic (ball drip) drain valve at each check valve for fire-department
connection.
3.11
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to
requirements in NFPA 14.
B.
Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals.
requirements for identification specified in Division 16.
3.12
Comply with
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform tests and inspections.
B.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
2.
Leak Test: After installation, charge systems and test for leaks. Repair
leaks and retest until no leaks exist.
Test and adjust controls and safeties.
Replace damaged and
malfunctioning controls and equipment.
FIRE-SUPPRESSION STANDPIPES
15038 - 20
July 28, 2016
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Frazer Shop and Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
Flush, test, and inspect standpipe systems according to NFPA 14,
"System Acceptance" Chapter.
Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices.
Start and run air compressors.
Coordinate with fire-alarm tests. Operate as required.
Coordinate with fire-pump tests. Operate as required.
Verify that equipment hose threads are same as local fire-department
equipment.
C.
Fire-suppression standpipe system will be considered defective if it does not
pass tests and inspections.
D.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.13
A.
3.14
DEMONSTRATION
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's
maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain specialty valves.
PIPING SCHEDULE
A.
Piping between Fire-Department Connections and Check Valves: Galvanized,
standard-weight steel pipe with threaded ends; cast-iron threaded fittings; and
threaded joints.
B.
Standard-pressure, wet-type, fire-suppression standpipe piping, NPS 4 and
smaller , shall be the following:
1.
Standard-weight, galvanized-steel pipe with threaded ends; galvanized,
gray-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints.
C.
Standard-pressure, wet-type, fire-suppression standpipe piping, NPS 5 to
NPS 8, shall be one of the following:
1.
Standard-weight, black-steel pipe with threaded ends; uncoated,
gray-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints.
2.1. Standard-weight, galvanized-steel pipe with threaded ends;
galvanized, gray-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints.
3.
Standard-weight, black-steel pipe with cut- or roll-grooved ends;
uncoated, grooved-end fittings for steel piping; grooved-end-pipe
couplings for steel piping; and grooved joints.
4.2. Standard-weight, galvanized-steel pipe with cut-grooved ends;
galvanized, grooved-end fittings for steel piping; grooved-end-pipe
couplings for steel piping; and grooved joints.
5.
Standard-weight, black-steel pipe with plain ends; steel welding
fittings; and welded joints.
FIRE-SUPPRESSION STANDPIPES
15038 - 21
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop and Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
6.3.
Schedule 10, galvanized-steel black-steel pipe with roll-grooved
ends; uncoated, grooved-end fittings for steel piping; grooved-endpipe couplings for steel piping; and grooved joints.
7.4. Schedule 10, galvanized black-steel pipe with plain ends; welding
fittings; and welded joints.
D.
Standard-pressure, dry-type, fire-suppression standpipe piping, NPS 4 and
smaller, shall be one of the following:
1.
2.
E.
Standard-weight, galvanized-steel pipe with threaded ends; galvanized,
gray-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints.
Standard-weight, galvanized-steel pipe with cut-grooved ends; galvanized,
grooved-end fittings for steel piping; grooved-end-pipe couplings for steel
piping; and grooved joints.
Standard-pressure, dry-type, fire-suppression standpipe piping, NPS 5 and
NPS 6, shall be one of the following:
1.
2.
Standard-weight, galvanized-steel pipe with threaded ends; galvanized,
gray-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints.
Standard-weight, galvanized-steel pipe with cut-grooved ends; galvanized,
grooved-end fittings for steel piping; grooved-end-pipe couplings for steel
piping; and grooved joints.
END OF SECTION
FIRE-SUPPRESSION STANDPIPES
15038 - 22
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop and Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
SECTION 15082
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
SUMMARY
Section includes insulating the following plumbing piping services:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
1.3
Domestic cold-water piping.
Domestic hot-water piping.
Domestic recirculating hot-water piping.
Roof drains and rainwater leaders
Supplies and drains for handicap-accessible lavatories and sinks.
None
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity,
water-vapor permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory- and field-applied,
if any).
B.
Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to
other work.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for
each type of insulation and hanger.
Detail attachment and covering of heat tracing inside insulation.
Detail insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of
insulation.
Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and
specialties for each type of insulation.
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
15082 - 1
July 28, 2016
5.
6.
7.
C.
Revision No. 1
Detail removable insulation at piping specialties, equipment connections,
and access panels.
Detail application of field-applied jackets.
Detail application at linkages of control devices.
Samples: For each type of insulation and jacket indicated. Identify each
Sample, describing product and intended use. Sample sizes are as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.4
Frazer Shop and Yard Expansion
Preformed Pipe Insulation Materials: 12 inches long by NPS 2.
Jacket Materials for Pipe: 12 inches long by NPS 2.
Sheet Jacket Materials: 12 inches square.
Manufacturer's Color Charts: For products where color is specified, show
the full range of colors available for each type of finish material.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
B.
Material Test Reports:
From a qualified testing agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results
for compliance of insulation materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and
jackets, with requirements indicated. Include dates of tests and test methods
employed.
C.
Field quality-control reports.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an
apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the
Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training.
B.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as
determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a testing
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation
and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material
containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1.
2.
C.
Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and
smoke-developed index of 50 or less.
Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and
smoke-developed index of 150 or less.
Mockups: Before installing insulation, build mockups for each type of insulation
and finish listed below to demonstrate quality of insulation application and
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
15082 - 2
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop and Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
finishes. Build mockups in the location indicated or, if not indicated, as directed
by Architect. Use materials indicated for the completed Work.
1.
Piping Mockups:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
D.
A.
1.7
A.
For each mockup, fabricate cutaway sections to allow observation of
application details for insulation materials, adhesives, mastics,
attachments, and jackets.
Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups
will be constructed.
Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting insulation
application.
Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the
Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically
approves such deviations in writing.
Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a
standard for judging the completed Work.
Demolish and remove mockups when directed.
Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements
specified for miscellaneous components:
1.
1.6
One 10-foot section of NPS 2 straight pipe.
One each of a 90-degree threaded, welded, and flanged elbow.
One each of a threaded, welded, and flanged tee fitting.
One NPS 2 or smaller valve, and one NPS 2-1/2 or larger valve.
Four support hangers including hanger shield and insert.
One threaded strainer and one flanged strainer with removable
portion of insulation.
One threaded reducer and one welded reducer.
One pressure temperature tap.
One mechanical coupling.
Supply and Drain Protective Shielding Guards: ICC A117.1.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer
with appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum
use temperature.
COORDINATION
Coordinate sizes and locations of supports, hangers, and insulation shields
specified in Section 220529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and
Equipment."
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
15082 - 3
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop and Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
B.
Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation
application. Before preparing piping Shop Drawings, establish and maintain
clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets
and finishes and for space required for maintenance.
C.
Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing.
1.8
SCHEDULING
A.
Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where
required, after installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may
begin on segments that have satisfactory test results.
B.
Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as
possible in each area of construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
INSULATION MATERIALS
A.
Comply with requirements in "Piping Insulation Schedule, General," "Indoor
Piping Insulation Schedule," "Outdoor, Aboveground Piping Insulation
Schedule," and "Outdoor, Underground Piping Insulation Schedule" articles for
where insulating materials shall be applied.
B.
Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.
C.
Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable
chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.
D.
Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as
acceptable according to ASTM C 795.
E.
Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the
manufacturing process.
F.
Cellular Glass:
Inorganic, incombustible, foamed or cellular glass with
annealed, rigid, hermetically sealed cells. Factory-applied jacket requirements
are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
a.
b.
Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Foamglas.
Knauf Insulation.
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
15082 - 4
July 28, 2016
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.2
A.
Frazer Shop and Yard Expansion
Block Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type I.
Special-Shaped Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type III.
Preformed Pipe Insulation without Jacket: Comply with ASTM C 552,
Type II, Class 1.
Preformed Pipe Insulation with Factory-Applied ASJ:
Comply with
ASTM C 552, Type II, Class 2.
Factory fabricate shapes according to ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585.
INSULATING CEMENTS
Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 195.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
a.
B.
Ramco Insulation, Inc.; Super-Stik.
Expanded or Exfoliated Vermiculite Insulating Cement:
ASTM C 196.
1.
Comply with
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
a.
2.3
Revision No. 1
Ramco Insulation, Inc.; Thermokote V.
ADHESIVES
A.
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates
and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless
otherwise indicated.
B.
Cellular-Glass Adhesive: Two-component, thermosetting urethane adhesive
containing no flammable solvents, with a service temperature range of minus
100 to plus 200 deg F.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
a.
Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H.
B. Fuller Company; 81-84.
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
15082 - 5
July 28, 2016
2.
3.
C.
Frazer Shop and Yard Expansion
For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or
less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA
Method 24).
Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the
California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the
Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using SmallScale Environmental Chambers."
PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
2.4
A.
Dow Corning Corporation; 739, Dow Silicone.
Johns Manville; Zeston Perma-Weld, CEEL-TITE Solvent Welding
Adhesive.
P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; Welding Adhesive.
Speedline Corporation; Polyco VP Adhesive.
For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or
less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA
Method 24).
Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the
California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the
Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using SmallScale Environmental Chambers."
MASTICS
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates;
comply with MIL-PRF-19565C, Type II.
1.
B.
Revision No. 1
For indoor applications, use mastics that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or
less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA
Method 24).
Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below-ambient
services.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
a.
b.
Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H.
B. Fuller Company; 30-80/30-90.
Vimasco Corporation; 749.
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
15082 - 6
July 28, 2016
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Frazer Shop and Yard Expansion
Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure B, 0.013 perm
at 43-mil dry film thickness.
Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F.
Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 58 percent by volume and 70 percent by
weight.
Color: White.
Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for indoor use on below-ambient
services.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
Revision No. 1
Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H.
B. Fuller Company; CP-30.
Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 501.
Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H.
B. Fuller Company; 30-35.
Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 55-10.
Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 0.05 perm at 35-mil dry film
thickness.
Service Temperature Range: 0 to 180 deg F.
Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 44 percent by volume and 62 percent by
weight.
Color: White.
Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on aboveambient services.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements available products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H.
B. Fuller Company; CP-10.
Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 550.
Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H.
B. Fuller Company; 46-50.
Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 55-50.
Vimasco Corporation; WC-1/WC-5.
Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 1.8 perms at 0.0625-inch dry
film thickness.
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
15082 - 7
July 28, 2016
3.
4.
5.
2.5
A.
Frazer Shop and Yard Expansion
Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F.
Solids Content: 60 percent by volume and 66 percent by weight.
Color: White.
LAGGING ADHESIVES
Description: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class I, Grade A, and shall be
compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
1.
2.
For indoor applications, use lagging adhesives that have a VOC content of
50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA
Method 24).
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
a.
b.
c.
3.
4.
5.
2.6
A.
Revision No. 1
Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H.
B. Fuller Company; CP-50 AHV2.
Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H.
B. Fuller Company; 30-36.
Vimasco Corporation; 713 and 714.
Fire-resistant, water-based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors
to adhere fire-resistant lagging cloths over pipe insulation.
Service Temperature Range: 0 to plus 180 deg F.
Color: White.
SEALANTS
Joint Sealants:
1.
Joint Sealants for Cellular-Glass and Phenolic Products: Subject to
compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
3.
Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H.
B. Fuller Company; CP-76.
Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 405.
Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H.
B. Fuller Company; 30-45.
Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 44-05.
Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Pittseal 444.
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and
substrates.
Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant.
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
15082 - 8
July 28, 2016
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Frazer Shop and Yard Expansion
Service Temperature Range: Minus 100 to plus 300 deg F.
Color: White or gray.
For indoor applications, sealants shall have a VOC content of 420 g/L or
less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA
Method 24).
Sealants shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the
California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the
Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using SmallScale Environmental Chambers."
FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
Revision No. 1
Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H.
B. Fuller Company; CP-76.
Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 405.
Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H.
B. Fuller Company; 95-44.
Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 44-05.
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and
substrates.
Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.
Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F.
Color: Aluminum.
For indoor applications, sealants shall have a VOC content of 420 g/L or
less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA
Method 24).
Sealants shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the
California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the
Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using SmallScale Environmental Chambers."
ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl, PVDC, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
a.
2.
Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H.
B. Fuller Company; CP-76.
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and
substrates.
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
15082 - 9
July 28, 2016
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.7
A.
Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.
Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F.
Color: White.
For indoor applications, sealants shall have a VOC content of 420 g/L or
less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA
Method 24).
Sealants shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the
California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the
Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using SmallScale Environmental Chambers."
Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various
applications. When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the
following:
2.
3.
A.
ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil
backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.
ASJ-SSL:
ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based
adhesive covered by a removable protective strip; complying with
ASTM C 1136, Type I.
FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper
backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.
FIELD-APPLIED FABRIC-REINFORCING MESH
Woven Glass-Fiber Fabric: Approximately 2 oz./sq. yd. with a thread count of
10 strands by 10 strands/sq. in. for covering pipe and pipe fittings.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
a.
B.
Revision No. 1
FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS
1.
2.8
Frazer Shop and Yard Expansion
Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H.
B. Fuller Company; Chil-Glas Number 10.
Woven Polyester Fabric: Approximately 1 oz./sq. yd. with a thread count of 10
strands by 10 strands/sq. in., in a Leno weave, for pipe.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements available products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
a.
Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H.
B. Fuller Company; Mast-A-Fab.
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
15082 - 10
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop and Yard Expansion
b.
2.9
A.
Revision No. 1
Vimasco Corporation; Elastafab 894.
FIELD-APPLIED CLOTHS
Woven Glass-Fiber Fabric: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I, plain weave,
and presized a minimum of 8 oz./sq. yd..
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
a.
Alpha Associates, Inc.; Alpha-Maritex 84215 and 84217/9485RW,
Luben 59.
b.
2.10
FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS
A.
Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise
indicated.
B.
PVC Jacket:
High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with
ASTM D 1784, Class 16354-C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for
shop or field cutting and forming. Thickness is indicated in field-applied jacket
schedules.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
4.
Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer.
Color: Color-code jackets based on system. Color as selected by
Architect.
Factory-fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available; otherwise,
field fabricate.
a.
C.
Johns Manville; Zeston.
P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; FG Series.
Proto Corporation; LoSmoke.
Speedline Corporation; SmokeSafe.
Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees,
valves, flanges, unions, reducers, end caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps,
mechanical joints, and P-trap and supply covers for lavatories.
Metal Jacket:
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
15082 - 11
July 28, 2016
1.
Frazer Shop and Yard Expansion
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H.
B. Fuller Company; Metal Jacketing Systems.
ITW Insulation Systems; Aluminum and Stainless Steel Jacketing.
RPR Products, Inc.; Insul-Mate.
Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or
5005, Temper H-14.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Sheet and roll stock ready for shop or field sizing Factory cut and
rolled to size.
Finish and thickness are indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.
Moisture Barrier for Indoor Applications: 3-mil-thick, heat-bonded
polyethylene and kraft paper or 2.5-mil-thick polysurlyn.
Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 3-mil-thick, heat-bonded
polyethylene and kraft paper or 2.5-mil-thick polysurlyn.
Factory-Fabricated Fitting Covers:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
D.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
a.
b.
A.
Same material, finish, and thickness as jacket.
Preformed 2-piece or gore, 45- and 90-degree, short- and longradius elbows.
Tee covers.
Flange and union covers.
End caps.
Beveled collars.
Valve covers.
Field fabricate fitting covers only if factory-fabricated fitting
covers are not available.
Underground Direct-Buried Jacket:
125-mil-thick vapor barrier and
waterproofing membrane consisting of a rubberized bituminous resin reinforced
with a woven-glass fiber or polyester scrim and laminated aluminum foil.
1.
2.11
Revision No. 1
Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Pittwrap.
Polyguard Products, Inc.; Insulrap No Torch 125.
TAPES
ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with
acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136.
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
15082 - 12
July 28, 2016
1.
Frazer Shop and Yard Expansion
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 428 AWF ASJ.
Avery
Dennison
Corporation,
Specialty
Tapes
Division;
Fasson 0836.
Compac Corporation; 104 and 105.
Venture Tape; 1540 CW Plus, 1542 CW Plus, and 1542 CW
Plus/SQ.
Width: 3 inches.
Thickness: 11.5 mils.
Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.
Elongation: 2 percent.
Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.
ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.
FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with
acrylic adhesive; complying with ASTM C 1136.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
Revision No. 1
ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 491 AWF FSK.
Avery
Dennison
Corporation,
Specialty
Tapes
Fasson 0827.
Compac Corporation; 110 and 111.
Venture Tape; 1525 CW NT, 1528 CW, and 1528 CW/SQ.
Division;
Width: 3 inches.
Thickness: 6.5 mils.
Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.
Elongation: 2 percent.
Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.
FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.
PVC Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied PVC jacket with
acrylic adhesive; suitable for indoor and outdoor applications.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
a.
b.
c.
ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 370 White PVC tape.
Compac Corporation; 130.
Venture Tape; 1506 CW NS.
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
15082 - 13
July 28, 2016
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
D.
Frazer Shop and Yard Expansion
Width: 2 inches.
Thickness: 6 mils.
Adhesion: 64 ounces force/inch in width.
Elongation: 500 percent.
Tensile Strength: 18 lbf/inch in width.
Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.12
A.
Revision No. 1
ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 488 AWF.
Avery
Dennison
Corporation,
Fasson 0800.
Compac Corporation; 120.
Venture Tape; 3520 CW.
Specialty
Tapes
Division;
Width: 2 inches.
Thickness: 3.7 mils.
Adhesion: 100 ounces force/inch in width.
Elongation: 5 percent.
Tensile Strength: 34 lbf/inch in width.
SECUREMENTS
Bands:
1.
2.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements available products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
a.
ITW Insulation Systems; Gerrard Strapping and Seals.
b.
RPR Products, Inc.; Insul-Mate Strapping and Seals.
Aluminum: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14,
0.020 inch thick, 3/4 inch wide with wing seal or closed seal.
B.
Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch-wide, stainless
steel or Monel.
C.
Wire:
steel.
1.
0.080-inch nickel-copper alloy or 0.062-inch soft-annealed, stainless
Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements available
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
15082 - 14
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop and Yard Expansion
a.
2.13
A.
C & F Wire.
PROTECTIVE SHIELDING GUARDS
Protective Shielding Pipe Covers :
1.
Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements, available
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.
B.
Revision No. 1
Engineered Brass Company.
Insul-Tect Products Co.; a subsidiary of MVG Molded Products.
McGuire Manufacturing.
Plumberex.
Truebro; a brand of IPS Corporation.
Zurn Industries, LLC; Tubular Brass Plumbing Products Operation.
Description: Manufactured plastic wraps for covering plumbing fixture hotand cold-water supplies and trap and drain piping.
Comply with
Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) requirements.
Protective Shielding Piping Enclosures, :
1.
Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements, available
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
2.
Truebro; a brand of IPS Corporation.
Zurn Industries, LLC; Tubular Brass Plumbing Products Operation.
Description: Manufactured plastic enclosure for covering plumbing fixture
hot- and cold-water supplies and trap and drain piping. Comply with ADA
requirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
EXAMINATION
Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of insulation
application.
1.
2.
Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and are free of
defects.
Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
15082 - 15
July 28, 2016
B.
3.2
Frazer Shop and Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove
materials that will adversely affect insulation application.
B.
Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be insulated.
insulating, apply a corrosion coating to insulated surfaces as follows:
1.
2.
Before
Stainless Steel: Coat 300 series stainless steel with an epoxy primer 5
mils thick and an epoxy finish 5 mils thick if operating in a temperature
range between 140 and 300 deg F. Consult coating manufacturer for
appropriate coating materials and application methods for operating
temperature range.
Carbon Steel: Coat carbon steel operating at a service temperature
between 32 and 300 deg F with an epoxy coating. Consult coating
manufacturer for appropriate coating materials and application methods
for operating temperature range.
C.
Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply
with requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation.
D.
Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be
in contact with stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.
3.3
GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and
even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of piping including fittings,
valves, and specialties.
B.
Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and
thicknesses required for each item of pipe system as specified in insulation
system schedules.
C.
Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the
service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack
insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.
D.
Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.
E.
Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
15082 - 16
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop and Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
F.
Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and
specialties.
G.
Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
H.
Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and
joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
I.
Install insulation with least number of joints practical.
J.
Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in
insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vaporbarrier mastic.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor
attachments.
For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend
insulation on anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to
point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to
structure with vapor-barrier mastic.
Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal
insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound
recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation.
Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture
by hanger, support, and shield.
K.
Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended
coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses.
L.
Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:
1.
2.
3.
Draw jacket tight and smooth.
Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch-wide strips, of same material as
insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching
staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c.
Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation
with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to
receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along
edge at 2 inches o.c.
a.
4.
5.
For below-ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.
Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material
manufacturer's written instructions, to maintain vapor seal.
Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams
and joints and at ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings.
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
15082 - 17
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop and Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
M.
Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75
percent of its nominal thickness.
N.
Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations
and cracking due to thermal movement.
O.
Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over
damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas.
Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints.
P.
For above-ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.4
A.
Vibration-control devices.
Testing agency labels and stamps.
Nameplates and data plates.
Cleanouts.
PENETRATIONS
Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations:
through roof penetrations.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Install insulation continuously
Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.
For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation
above roof surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring
indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications
tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.
Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches
below top of roof flashing.
Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.
B.
Insulation Installation at Underground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate
insulation flush with sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant.
C.
Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations:
insulation continuously through wall penetrations.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Install
Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.
For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation
inside wall surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring
indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications
tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.
Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall
flashing at least 2 inches.
Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
15082 - 18
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop and Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
D.
Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not
Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.
E.
Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install
insulation continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions.
1.
F.
Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:
1.
2.
3.5
Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping"
for firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers.
Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations.
Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies.
Comply
requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."
with
GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION
A.
Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except
where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation
material installation articles.
B.
Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other
specialties with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity unless
otherwise indicated.
Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings
made from same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each
piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with
adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating
cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform
with adjoining pipe insulation.
Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe
insulation of same material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut
sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and
hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive.
Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe
insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent
pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the
thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.
For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box
studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with
insulating cement.
Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe
insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent
pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the
thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
15082 - 19
July 28, 2016
6.
7.
8.
9.
Frazer Shop and Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate
strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and
replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable
reusable insulation cover. For below-ambient services, provide a design
that maintains vapor barrier.
Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe
insulation. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the
thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.
Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and
coat with a mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below-ambient services
and a breather mastic for above-ambient services. Reinforce the mastic
with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and wellshaped contour.
For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for
flexible elastomeric and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows,
tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC
end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing using PVC
tape.
Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word
"union." Match size and color of pipe labels.
C.
Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure
temperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and
transmitters on insulated pipes. Shape insulation at these connections by
tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish with
finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.
D.
Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated.
conform to the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Installation shall
Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation
of same thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket
as adjoining pipe insulation.
When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation,
extend insulation from flanges or union long at least two times the
insulation thickness over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of flange or
union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless-steel or aluminum
bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket.
Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for
flanges, except divide the two-part section on the vertical center line of
valve body.
When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each
consisting of mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this
wire frame, with its attached insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend
insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of
valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe insulation with
insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
15082 - 20
July 28, 2016
5.
3.6
A.
3.
4.
Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten
bands without deforming insulation materials.
Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints,
and protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.
For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above-ambient services,
secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.
For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below-ambient services, do
not staple longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive
as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vaporbarrier mastic and flashing sealant.
Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts,
plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation.
Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer
circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of
cellular-glass block insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation.
Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive,
overlap seams at least 1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant.
Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:
1.
2.
D.
in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a
smooth finish.
Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish
exposed surfaces with a metal jacket.
Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:
2.
C.
Revision No. 1
INSTALLATION OF CELLULAR-GLASS INSULATION
1.
B.
Frazer Shop and Yard Expansion
Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe
insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
When preformed sections of insulation are not available, install mitered
sections of cellular-glass insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire
or bands.
Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:
1.
2.
3.
Install preformed sections of cellular-glass insulation to valve body.
Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve
operation without disturbing insulation.
Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
15082 - 21
July 28, 2016
3.7
A.
Where glass-cloth jackets are indicated, install directly over bare insulation or
insulation with factory-applied jackets.
2.
3.
5.
3.8
A.
Draw jacket material smooth and tight.
Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket.
Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
Install jacket with 1-1/2-inch laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch-wide
joint strips at end joints.
Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and
exposed insulation with vapor-barrier mastic.
Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch overlap at longitudinal
seams and end joints. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
1.
D.
Draw jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2-inch overlap at seams and
joints.
Embed glass cloth between two 0.062-inch-thick coats of lagging
adhesive.
Completely encapsulate insulation with coating, leaving no exposed
insulation.
Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Revision No. 1
FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION
1.
B.
Frazer Shop and Yard Expansion
Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead
under lap and the finish bead along seam and joint edge.
Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal
seams and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water.
Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation
manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 12 inches o.c. and at
end joints.
FINISHES
Insulation with ASJ, Glass-Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint
jacket with paint system identified below and as specified in Section 099123
"Interior Painting."
1.
Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with
jacket material and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric
mildew proof.
a.
Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex-emulsion size.
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
15082 - 22
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop and Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
B.
Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply
two coats of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.
C.
Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow
visual inspection of the completed Work.
D.
Do not field paint aluminum or stainless-steel jackets.
3.9
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests
and inspections.
B.
Perform tests and inspections.
C.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
D.
3.10
Inspect pipe, fittings, strainers, and valves, randomly selected by
Architect, by removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in
reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to
three locations of straight pipe, three locations of threaded fittings, three
locations of welded fittings, two locations of threaded strainers, two
locations of welded strainers, three locations of threaded valves, and three
locations of flanged valves for each pipe service defined in the "Piping
Insulation Schedule, General" Article.
All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection
reveals noncompliance with requirements.
PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A.
Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are
identified for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material
is listed for a piping system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's
option.
B.
Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the
following:
1.
2.
3.
Drainage piping located in crawl spaces.
Underground piping.
Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel
injury.
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
15082 - 23
July 28, 2016
3.11
A.
Frazer Shop and Yard Expansion
INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE
Domestic Cold Water:
1.
NPS 1 and Smaller: Insulation shall be one of the following:
a.
2.
NPS 1-1/4 and Smaller: Insulation shall be the following:
a.
2.
Jacketed Cellular Cellular Glass with vapor barrier:
thick.
1-1/2 inches
Stormwater and Overflow:
1.
All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be the following:
a.
Jacketed Cellular Cellular Glass with vapor barrier: 1 inches thick.
Roof Drain and Overflow Drain Bodies:
1.
All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be the following:
a.
3.12
Jacketed Cellular Cellular Glass with vapor barrier: 1 inch thick.
NPS 1-1/2 and Larger: Insulation shall be the following:
a.
D.
Cellular Jacketed Cellular Glass with vapor barrier: 1 inche thick.
Domestic Hot and Recirculated Hot Water:
1.
C.
CellularJacketed Cellular Glass with vapor barrier: 1 inches thick.
NPS 1-1/4 and Larger: Insulation shall be the following:
a.
B.
Revision No. 1
Cellular Jacketed Cellular Glass with vapor barrier:
thick.
1-1/2 inches
INDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE
A.
Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket,
install the field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket, where indicated..
B.
If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's
option.
C.
Piping, Concealed:
1.
None is required on piping with factory applied jacketing.
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
15082 - 24
July 28, 2016
2.
3.
4.
D.
A.
Revision No. 1
PVC, Color-Coded by System: 30 mils thick.
Aluminum, Smooth : 0.032 inch thick.
Painted Aluminum, Smooth: 0.032 inch thick.
Piping, Exposed:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.13
Frazer Shop and Yard Expansion
None is required on piping with factory applied jacketing.
PVC, Color-Coded by System: 30 mils thick.
Aluminum, Smooth: 0.032 inch thick.
Painted Aluminum, Smooth: 0.032 inch thick.
UNDERGROUND, FIELD-INSTALLED INSULATION JACKET
For underground direct-buried piping applications, install underground directburied jacket over insulation material.
END OF SECTION
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
15082 - 25
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
SECTION 15885
DUCTWORK INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A.
1.02
RELATED SECTIONS:
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
1.03
Special Requirements For HVAC Work. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 15500
HVAC Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . .Section 15502
Vibration Isolation And Seismic Restraints For HVAC. . . . . Section 15504
Air Inlets And Outlets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Section 15620
Gas Fired Makeup Air Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 15855
Gas Fired Heat-Recovery Heating And Ventilating Units . . .Section 15856
Split-System Heat-Pump Air Conditioning Units . . . . . . . . . .Section 15857
Rooftop Heating, Ventilating And Air Conditioning Units . . . Section 15858
Fans. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 15860
Ductwork And Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 15880
DDC Automatic Temperature Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Section 15970
Testing, Adjusting and Balancing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 15993
SUBMITTALS:
A.
1.04
Provide thermal insulation and internal acoustic lining on the ductwork
installed and required on this Project, as specified herein and as needed
for a complete and proper installation. All insulation materials shall be free
of asbestos.
Submit manufacturers’ specifications for all insulation products, and
submit schedule showing manufacturer's product number, k-value,
thickness, MSDS sheets and furnished accessories for each duct system
requiring insulation.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A.
Installer's Qualifications
Firm with at least three years successful installation experience on
projects with mechanical insulations similar to that required for this
Project.
B.
Flame/Smoke Ratings
Provide mechanical insulation with flame spread index of 25 or less and
smoke developed index of 50 or less, as tested by ASTM E-84 method
and as defined in the 2009 International Mechanical Code.
C.
Code and Standards
DUCTWORK INSULATION
15885 - 1
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
Comply with the requirements of the 2009 International Energy
Conservation Code, with ASHRAE Standard 90.1, and with all applicable
ASTM Standards.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MANUFACTURERS:
A.
Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products
which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
Babcock & Wilcox; Insulating Products Div.
Certain Teed Corp.
Knauf Fiber Glass.
Schuller International Inc.
Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corp.
Pittsburgh Corning Corp.
Rubatex Corp.
Thermal Ceramics Division of 3M Corp.
2.02
MATERIALS:
A.
Board Type
Fiberglass board: 3-lb minimum density, thermal conductivity not
exceeding 0.23 at 75o F mean temperature, factory applied facing of
aluminum foil reinforced with fiberglass yarn mesh and laminated to 40 lb
kraft paper chemically treated to give the permanent flamespread and
smoke-developed characteristics required. The use of plain (unfaced)
fiberglass board on ductwork serving only as heating supply ducts is also
acceptable.
B.
Flexible Type
Flexible (blanket) type fiberglass: 1-lb nominal density, thermal
conductivity not exceeding 0.29 at 75o F mean temperature; factory
applied foil reinforced kraft facing as specified for the fiberglass board.
C.
Asbestos free, rigid, anhydrous calcium silicate block shall be lightweight
with thermal conductivity not exceeding 0.42 at 200o F mean temperature.
D.
Calcium-Magnesium-Silicate (CMS) Wool Wrap: CMS wool wrap
insulation shall have Omega Point Labs (OPL) or UL listing and. CMS
wool wrap blankets shall be fully encapsulated.
DUCTWORK INSULATION
15885 - 2
July 28, 2016
E.
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
Jackets for Ductwork Insulation
ASTM C-921; Type I for ductwork with temperatures below ambient; Type
II for ductwork with temperatures above ambient. (Type I-Vapor Barrier,
Type II-Water Vapor Permeable).
F.
Ductwork Insulation Accessories
Provide staples, bands, wires, tape, anchors, corner angles and all other
items and accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer for
applications indicated.
G.
Ductwork Insulation Compounds
Provide cements, adhesives, coatings, sealers, protective finishes and all
other items and compounds recommended by insulation manufacturer for
applications indicated.
H.
2.03
Internal Acoustic Duct Lining: Refer to the specified requirements of
Paragraphs 2.03 and 3.03 herein below.
INTERNAL ACOUSTIC DUCT LINING:
A.
Internal acoustic duct lining shall be fabricated of fiberglass, covered with a
matte-faced covering and sealed with an acrylic polymer. Surface burning
characteristics shall have a flame spread index less than 25 and smoke
developed index less than 50 per ASTM E84. Lining shall be secured with
pins or mechanical fasteners. Lining that is secured with adhesive only is
not acceptable. The fiberglass lining shall not support fungi or bacterial
growth as per ASTM C1338, ASTM G21 and ASTM G22. Fiberglass lining
shall conform to the erosion test method described in UL Publication No.
181. Fiberglass lining density shall be 1-1/2 lbs. per cubic foot, minimum
of 2-inches thickness for applications where specified herein .
The duct lining shall have the following minimum R values:
Thic
thickness (in)
2
RV
R-Value (hrft2°F/BTU)
8.7
The minimum duct lining sound absorption coefficients shall be as follows:
Thi
thickness (in.)
2
NRC
1.00
Approved manufacturers:
DUCTWORK INSULATION
15885 - 3
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
Owens Corning Aeroflex
Johns Manville Permacote Linacoustic
Certainteed Ultralite
B.
All adhesives and sealants used on the fabrication/installation of internal
acoustical lining shall comply with the South Coast Air Quality
Management District (SCAQMD) Rule #1168; VOC limits shall comply
with the limits indicated in Table 1 of LEED Version 2.2, Indoor
Environmental Quality Section, Credit EQ-4.1. Those limits correspond to
an effective date of the SCAQMD Rule #1168 of July 1, 2005, and Rule
Amendment date of January 7, 2005.
C.
Acoustical ductwork lining shall be provided for ductwork only where
specified herein, as follows:
1.
The full extents of unit RTAC-1-M supply and return/exhaust
ductwork mains, from the unit’s supply and return/exhaust duct
connections to the boundary wall of the new Component Repair
Shop served by the unit.
2.
The full extent of the Air Compressor Room’s supply fan, SF-1-M,
supply air ductwork, from the underside of the roof to the boundary
wall of the Air Compressor Room served by the supply fan.
3.
Internal acoustical duct lining shall not be provided for any other
ductwork systems associated with any other HVAC equipment,
including HV units, MU units, EF exhaust fans, any other SF supply
fans, or the existing ERV unit.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
COMPLETION OF TESTS:
A.
3.02
Before applying the insulation, all tests specified under Division 15
Sections should have been completed. Do not proceed with work until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to
the SEPTA.
INSTALLATION:
A.
Omit insulation if duct is internally lined with acoustic material of sufficient
thermal conductivity providing a conductive resistance as required by the
2009 International Energy Conservation Code.
B.
Fire Seal Application: Where pipes pass through fire walls, fire partitions,
fire rated pipe chase walls or floors above grade, insulation shall be
interrupted and a Firestopping seal shall be provided as specified under
Section 15500.
DUCTWORK INSULATION
15885 - 4
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
C.
Fiberglass board shall be used to insulate ductwork that is exposed in fan
or equipment rooms or spaces.
D.
Flexible type duct insulation shall be used to insulate ductwork which is
installed in concealed spaces (hung ceilings, furred spaces, pipe and duct
spaces).
E.
Facing and Finishing:
1.
Exposed Ducts:
Insulation on ductwork exposed to view in the Maintenance and
Repair Shops, Equipment and Mechanical Rooms, shall have
facing or finish as specified herein: Facing or finish shall be
reinforced with metal corner beads and shall have a glass cloth
finish installed in the following manner: Brush a full coat of lagging
adhesive on all surfaces of the ductwork insulation. Imbed glass
cloth in the wet coating, smoothing to avoid wrinkles. Overlap cloth
seams 4", locating seams so as to be hidden from view, wherever
practicable. Apply a second coat of lagging adhesive.
2.
F.
Concealed Ducts: Insulation on warm air ductwork installed within
hung ceilings and furred spaces, shall have no additional finishing,
other than the foil-reinforced-kraft facing. All cold air ductwork for
the above spaces shall be provided with two coats of a vapor
retardant coating at least 1/16” thick with a layer of glass cloth in
between.
Installation of Board Type Insulation
1.
Insulation shall be applied with edges tightly butted. It shall be
impaled on pins welded to the duct and secured with speed clips
impaled over the pins. Pins shall be cut off close to speed clips. On
horizontal ducts, pins shall be spaced not less than one per square
foot for the bottom surface, and not less than one per two square
feet on the sides and top surface. On vertical ducts, the pins shall
be spaced not less than one clip per two square feet of duct
surface. For faced insulation, point all joints and cracks with vapor
barrier coating, and seal all joints and speed clips with a 3" wide
strip of foil-reinforced-kraft facing adhered with insulation adhesive.
The use of pressure sensitive tape of the same facing material also
is acceptable for this purpose.
2.
Where, because of space or size restriction, the welded pin method
cannot be used, the use of stick clips will be approved and the
insulation shall be additionally secured to the duct with insulation
adhesive. The adhesive shall cover the entire surface of the sheet
metal when applied to underside of horizontal duct, but may be
DUCTWORK INSULATION
15885 - 5
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
applied in strips for application to top and sides with a minimum of
50% coverage. Insulation shall be additionally secured with No. 16
gage soft annealed galvanized steel wire on not more than 12"
centers. Continuous metal, corner angles shall be used to protect
edges of the insulation.
G.
Installation of Flexible Type Insulation
Flexible type insulation shall be cut slightly longer than the perimeter of
the duct to insure full thickness at corners. Insulation shall be applied with
edges tightly butted, and seams stapled approximately 6" on centers with
outward clinching staples. Insulation shall be additionally secured with No.
16 gage soft annealed galvanized steel wire on not more than 12" centers.
When the width of a horizontal duct is 24" or more, the insulation shall
also be fastened with welded pins or stick clips spaced on 18" centers on
the bottom surface of the duct. All joints and clips shall be taped and
sealed with 3" wide strips of foil-reinforced-kraft facing applied with
insulation adhesive. The use of pressure sensitive tape of the same facing
material also is acceptable for this purpose.
3.03
H.
Clean and dry ductwork prior to insulating. Butt insulation joints firmly
together to ensure complete and tight fit over surfaces to be covered.
I.
Maintain integrity of vapor-barrier on ductwork insulation, and protect it to
prevent puncture and other damage.
J.
Extend ductwork insulation without interruption through walls, floors and
similar ductwork penetrations, except where otherwise indicated such as
rated penetrations.
INSTALLATION OF INTERNAL ACOUSTIC DUCT LINING:
A.
Dimensions of ductwork, as shown on the Contract Drawings, that are
specified under this Section to be provided with acoustical lining, are the
inside-clear dimensions of the duct after the internal duct lining has been
installed. The sheetmetal duct dimensions shall be increased as
necessary to compensate for the internal duct liner thickness.
B.
Sheet metal nosing shall be provided for all exposed edges of lining,
including the full perimeters of access doors and all trailing edges and
leading edges of the lining, regardless of the direction of air flow.
C.
All portions of the duct designated to receive acoustical duct liner shall be
completely covered with acoustical duct liner. Transverse joints shall be
neatly butted and there shall be no interruptions or gaps. The black
coated surface of the acoustical duct liner shall face the air stream. The
acoustical duct liner shall be adhered to the sheet metal with 100%
coverage of adhesive and all exposed leading and trailing edges and all
transverse joints coated with adhesive. Adhesive shall conform to
DUCTWORK INSULATION
15885 - 6
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
Adhesive and Sealant Council Standards for Adhesive for duct liner, ASCC-7001C-1972. The acoustical duct liner shall be additionally secured with
mechanical fasteners except that gripnails or the equivalent shall not be
allowed. Mechanical fasteners shall conform to Mechanical Fastener
Standard MF-1-1971, available from SMACNA. Acoustical duct liner shall
be cut to assure overlapped and compressed longitudinal corner joints.
Fasteners shall start within 3” of the upstream transverse edges of the
liner and 3” from the longitudinal joints and shall be spaced as
recommended by SMACNA.
3.04
PROTECTION AND REPLACEMENT:
A.
Replace damaged insulation that cannot be repaired satisfactorily,
including units with vapor barrier damage and moisture saturated units.
B.
Protection
The Installing Contractor shall provide protection for insulation work during
the construction period, to avoid damage and deterioration.
3.07
SCHEDULES OF DUCTWORK THERMAL INSULATION AND INTERNAL
ACOUSTICAL LINING:
A.
B.
Acoustical ductwork lining shall be provided for ductwork only where
specified herein, as follows:
1.
The full extents of unit RTAC-1-M supply and return/exhaust
ductwork mains, from the unit’s supply and return/exhaust duct
connections to the boundary wall of the new Component Repair
Shop served by the unit.
2.
The full extent of the Air Compressor Room’s supply fan, SF-1-M,
supply air ductwork, from the underside of the roof to the boundary
wall of the Air Compressor Room served by the supply fan.
3.
Internal acoustical duct lining shall not be provided for any other
ductwork systems associated with any other HVAC equipment,
including HV units, MU units, EF exhaust fans, any other SF supply
fans, or the existing ERV unit.
Thermal Insulation Omitted: Do not provide thermal insulation for the
following:
1.
Access door, test hole fittings, damper quadrants, except as
otherwise specified. The adjoining insulation shall be neatly
finished around such devices.
2.
Exposed conditioned air supply ductwork (with conventional 55
degrees F duct temperatures in the cooling mode) in “finished”
DUCTWORK INSULATION
15885 - 7
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
spaces that they serve, need not be insulated. When low
temperature supply ducts have nominal maximum 52 degrees F air
in the cooling mode, ALL ductwork and fittings are to be insulated
even if exposed in the spaces that they serve. Exposed low
temperature supply ducts shall be additionally coated with two
coats of a vapor retardant coating at least 1/16th inch thick with a
layer of glass cloth in between.
C.
3.
Exhaust ductwork need not be insulated, except the portion of the
duct between motorized spill damper and spill louver.
4.
Indoor-mounted HV systems supply and exhaust ductwork exposed
within the Maintenance Shop, shall not be insulated.
Exposed Ducts/Plenums in the Maintenance and Repair Shops,
Equipment and Mechanical Rooms: (applicable to hot and cold ducts)
1. Provide Thermal Insulation For The Following:
2.
D.
All outside air intake ductwork and plenums not preinsulated at the factory.
b.
Outdoor air intake ducts in their entirety.
c.
Exhaust duct from motorized spill damper to spill louver, as
applicable.
d.
Supply and return ducts, except HV unit supply and return
air ductwork exposed within the shop or space that it serves.
e.
Heating plenums not pre-insulated at the factory.
Insulate the above with rigid fiberglass board, 2” thick.
Cold Duct Work:
1.
E.
a.
Insulate
a.
Concealed supply and return ductwork in their entirety from the
fans (or blower unit) to room terminal inlets and outlets, shall be
insulated with flexible fiberglass 2” thick, with integral vapor
barrier.
b.
Exposed supply and return ductwork installed outside of the
space(s) served, shall be insulated with rigid fiberglass board,
2” thick, with integral vapor barrier.
Concealed Hot Ductwork
DUCTWORK INSULATION
15885 - 8
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
1.
Insulate the following:
a.
2.
Concealed supply and return ductwork between fan
discharge, heating unit discharge, and room terminal inlets
and outlets.
Insulate each system specified above with the following:
a.
F.
Revision No. 1
Flexible Fiberglass: 2" thick, application limited to concealed
locations.
Insulate the following:
1.
Dual Temperature Ductwork:
Concealed hot/cold supply and return ductwork between fan
discharge or HVAC unit discharge and room terminal inlets and
outlets.
2.
Insulate system specified above with the following:
a.
G.
Flexible Fiberglass: 2" thick, application limited to concealed
locations.
Insulate the following:
1.
Dual Temperature Ductwork:
Exposed hot/cold supply and return ductwork not serving the space
in which it is installed:
2.
Insulate system specified above with the following:
a.
Rigid fiberglass board, 2” thick
Exposed ductwork serving the space that it is in, if coupled with 55
degrees F cool air, need not be insulated. Exposed ductwork serving
the space it is in, if coupled with maximum 52 degrees F low
temperature cool air, shall be insulated and additionally provided with
vapor barrier coating consisting of two coats of a vapor retardant at
least 1/16th inch thick with a layer of glass cloth in between.
END OF SECTION
DUCTWORK INSULATION
15885 - 9
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
LIST OF SUBMITTALS:
SUBMITTAL
DATE SUBMITTED
DATE APPROVED
Product Data:
______________
_____________
______________
_____________
1. Manufacturers Product Data
2. Installation Instructions
3. Schedule
Maintenance Data:
1. Spare Parts Lists
2. Maintenance Manual
DUCTWORK INSULATION
15885 - 10
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
SECTION 16341
MEDIUM-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
A.
SUMMARY
This Section includes metal-enclosed interrupter switchgear with the following
optional components, features, and accessories:
1.
2.
3.
B.
1.02
A.
This switchgear requires approval by PECO for conformity to PECO standards
and for installation of PECO metering equipment.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of switchgear and related equipment, include the
following:
1.
2.
B.
Copper, silver-plated main bus at connection points.
Analog instruments.
Surge arresters.
Rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and
accessories for individual interrupter switches.
Time-current characteristic curves for overcurrent protective devices,
including fusible devices.
Shop Drawings: For each type of switchgear and related equipment, include
the following:
1.
Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, including required
clearances and service space around equipment. Show method of field
assembly and location and size of each field connection. Include the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Tabulation of installed devices with features and ratings.
Outline and general arrangement drawing showing dimensions,
shipping sections, and weights of each assembled section.
Drawing of cable termination compartments showing preferred
locations for conduits and indicating space available for cable
terminations.
Floor plan drawing showing locations for anchor bolts.
Current ratings of buses.
Short-time and short-circuit ratings of switchgear assembly.
MEDIUM-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
16341 - 1
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
g.
h.
2.
3.
Revision No. 1
Nameplate legends. Provide signage to meet PECO standards
wording a letter height.
PECO Utility company's metering provisions with indication of
approval by utility company.
Design Calculations: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional
engineer. Calculate requirements for selecting seismic restraints.
Wiring Diagrams: For each type of switchgear and related equipment,
include the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Power, signal, and control wiring.
Three-line diagrams of current and future secondary circuits showing
device terminal numbers and internal diagrams.
Schematic control diagrams.
Diagrams showing connections of component devices and
equipment.
C.
Coordination Drawings: Floor plans showing dimensioned layout, required
working clearances, and required area above and around switchgear where
piping and ducts are prohibited. Show switchgear layout and relationships
between components and adjacent structural and mechanical elements. Show
support locations, type of support, and weight on each support. Identify field
measurements. Drawings shall be submitted to PECO for review and approval.
D.
Source quality-control test reports.
E.
Field quality-control test reports.
F.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For switchgear and switchgear components
to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to
items specified in Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include
the following:
1.
2.
1.03
A.
Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent
protective devices.
Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of
overcurrent protective device.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience
and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the
InterNational Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing
laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
MEDIUM-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
16341 - 2
July 28, 2016
1.
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the
InterNational Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for
Certification in Engineering Technologies to supervise on-site testing
specified in Part 3.
B.
Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience
and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a nationally recognized
testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7.
C.
Source Limitations:
Obtain each type of switchgear and associated
components through one source from a single manufacturer.
D.
Product Options:
Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional
requirements of switchgear and are based on the specific system indicated.
Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements."
E.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as
defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
F.
Comply with IEEE C2.
1.04
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver in sections of lengths that can be moved past obstructions in delivery
path as indicated.
B.
Store switchgear indoors in clean dry space with uniform temperature to
prevent condensation. Protect switchgear from exposure to dirt, fumes, water,
corrosive substances, and physical damage.
C.
If stored in areas subjected to weather, cover switchgear to provide protection
from weather, dirt, dust, corrosive substances, and physical damage. Remove
loose packing and flammable materials from inside switchgear; install electric
heating (250 W per section) to prevent condensation.
1.05
A.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Environmental Limitations:
Rate equipment for continuous operation at
indicated ampere ratings for the following conditions:
1.
B.
Ambient temperature not exceeding 122 deg F.
Product Selection for Restricted Space:
Drawings indicate maximum
dimensions for switchgear, including clearances between switchgear and
MEDIUM-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
16341 - 3
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
adjacent surfaces and other items.
dimensions.
C.
Comply with indicated maximum
Interruption of Existing Electrical Service: Do not interrupt electrical service to
facilities occupied by SEPTA or others unless permitted under the following
conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electrical service
according to requirements indicated:
1.
2.
1.06
Revision No. 1
Notify Construction Manager no fewer than five days in advance of
proposed interruption of electrical service.
Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without Construction
Manager's written permission.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate layout and installation of switchgear and components with other
construction including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces.
Maintain required clearances for workspace and equipment access doors and
panels.
B.
Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and
formwork requirements are specified in Division 3.
1.07
A.
EXTRA MATERIALS
Maintenance Tools: Furnish tools and miscellaneous items required for
interrupter switchgear test, inspection, maintenance, and operation. Include the
following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Fuse-handling tool.
Extension rails, lifting device, transport or dockable dolly or mobile lift, and
all other items necessary to remove circuit breaker from housing and
transport to remote location.
Racking handle to move circuit breaker manually between connected and
disconnected positions, and a secondary test coupler to permit testing of
circuit breaker without removal from switchgear.
Spare Parts: Provide spare fuses of each type and size, one for each installed
fuse.
MEDIUM-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
16341 - 4
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
A.
2.02
MANUFACTURERS
In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following
requirements apply to product selection:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements and PECO,
provide products by one of the manufacturers specified.
MANUFACTURED UNITS
A.
Description:
Factory
IEEE C37.20.1.
B.
Ratings: Suitable for application in 3-phase, 4-wire wye connected 60-Hz,
solidly grounded-neutral system.
C.
System Voltage: 33 kV 3 phase, 4 wire grounded wye primary nominal; 34.5 kV
maximum.
2.03
A.
assembled
and
tested,
and
complying
with
METAL-ENCLOSED INTERRUPTER SWITCHGEAR
Available Manufacturers:
1.
2.1.
3.2.
4.
5.3.
6.4.
ABB Control, Inc.
Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Products.
S&C Electric Company.
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
Square D; Schneider Electric.
Penn Panel & Box Co.
B.
Comply with IEEE C37.20.3.
C.
Comply with IEEE C37.20.7. Provide arc-resistant switchgear, Type 1.
D.
BIL: Minimum 150 kV.
E.
Design Level of Available-Source Fault Current: Integrated short-circuit rating
consistent with value of fault current indicated on the drawings.
F.
Ratings: Comply with standard ratings designated in IEEE C37.20.3 for
maximum-rated voltage specified.
1.
Main-Bus Rating: 600 A, continuous.
MEDIUM-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
16341 - 5
July 28, 2016
G.
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
Interrupter Switches: Stationary, gang operated, and suitable for application at
maximum short-circuit rating of integrated switchgear assembly.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Rating: 600-A continuous duty and load break.
Duty-Cycle, Fault Closing: 20,000 asymmetrical A.
Switch Action: No external arc and no significant quantities of ionized gas
released into the enclosure.
Switch Construction: Supported entirely by interior framework of structure,
with copper switchblades and stored-energy operating mechanism.
Phase Barriers: Full length of switchblades and fuses for each pole;
designed for easy removal; allow visual inspection of switch components if
barrier is in place.
Protective Shields: Cover live components and terminals.
Fuses: De-energized if switch is open.
H.
Mechanical Interlock: Prevent opening switch compartment door unless
switchblades are open, and prevent closing switch if door is open.
I.
Window: Permit viewing switchblade positions if door is closed.
J.
Power Fuses: Subject to review and approval by PECO and shall comply with
the following and with applicable requirements in NEMA SG 2:
1.
S&C type SMU-20, sized as indicated on the drawings.
2.
3.
Indicator: Integral with each fuse to indicate when it has blown.
Mounting: Positively held in position with provision for easy removal and
replacement from front without special tools.
Current-Limiting Fuses: Full-range, fast-replaceable, current-limiting type
that will operate without explosive noise or expulsion of gas, vapor, or
foreign matter from tube.
4.
2.04
A.
FABRICATION
Outdoor Enclosure: Galvanized steel, weatherproof construction; integral
structural-steel base frame with factory-applied asphaltic undercoating.
1.
Each compartment shall have the following features:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Structural design and anchorage adequate to resist loads imposed
by 125-mph wind.
Space heater operating at one-half or less of rated voltage, sized to
prevent condensation.
Louvers equipped with insect and rodent screen and filter, and
arranged to permit air circulation while excluding rodents and exterior
dust.
Hinged front door with locking provisions.
MEDIUM-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
16341 - 6
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
e.
f.
Revision No. 1
Power for heaters by control power transformer.
Duplex receptacle rated at 120 volts.
B.
Finish: Manufacturer's standard gray finish over rust-inhibiting primer on
phosphatizing-treated metal surfaces.
C.
Bus Transition Unit: Arranged to suit bus and adjacent units.
D.
Incoming-Line Unit: Dead front arranged to suit incoming line.
E.
Outgoing Feeder Units: Dead front arranged to suit distribution feeders.
2.05
COMPONENTS
A.
Main Bus: Copper, silver plated at connection points full length of switchgear.
B.
Ground Bus: Copper, silver plated or copper, tin plated; minimum size 1/4 by 2
inches; full length of switchgear.
C.
Bus Insulation: Covered with flame-retardant insulation.
D.
Surge Arresters: 27 kV distribution class, metal-oxide-varistor type. Comply
with NEMA LA 1.
1.
E.
2.06
A.
Provision for Future Devices: Equip compartments with rails, mounting
brackets, supports, necessary appurtenances, and bus connections.
IDENTIFICATION
Materials: Refer to Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification." Identify units,
devices, controls, and wiring. Identify each compartment on the front door as
follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.07
A.
Install in cable termination compartments in each phase of circuit as
shown on the drawings.
LINE LOAD BREAK SWITCH, 33,000 VOLTS.
MAIN NUMBER 1 ICE MELTING TRANSFORMER
MAIN NUMBER 2 MAIN BUILDING TRANSFORMER
MAIN NUMBER 3 FIRE PUMP TRANSFORMER
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
Before shipment of equipment, perform the following tests and prepare test
reports:
1.
Production tests on circuit breakers according to ANSI C37.09.
MEDIUM-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
16341 - 7
July 28, 2016
2.
B.
2.
A.
Revision No. 1
Production tests on completed switchgear assembly according to
IEEE C37.20.2.
Prepare equipment for shipment.
1.
2.08
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Provide suitable crating, blocking, and supports so equipment will
withstand expected domestic shipping and handling shocks and vibration.
Weatherproof equipment for shipment. Close connection openings to
prevent entrance of foreign material during shipment and storage.
FACTORY FINISHES
Finish: Manufacturer's standard color finish applied to equipment before
shipping.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
A.
EXAMINATION
Examine elements and surfaces to receive switchgear for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances, required clearances, and other
conditions affecting performance.
1.
3.02
A.
INSTALLATION
Anchor switchgear assembly to 4-inch, channel-iron sill embedded in concrete
base and attach by bolting.
1.
2.
3.
3.03
A.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
Sills: Select to suit switchgear; level and grout flush into concrete base.
Concrete Bases: 4 inches high, reinforced, with chamfered edges.
Extend base no less than 3 inches in all directions beyond the maximum
dimensions of switchgear.
Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels,
and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from switchgear
units and components.
IDENTIFICATION
Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components;
provide warning signs as specified in Division 16 Section "Electrical
Identification."
MEDIUM-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
16341 - 8
July 28, 2016
B.
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Diagram and Instructions:
1.
Frame under clear acrylic plastic on front of switchgear.
a.
b.
2.
3.04
Revision No. 1
Operating Instructions: Printed basic instructions for switchgear,
including and emergency procedures.
System Power Riser Diagrams: Depict power sources, feeders,
distribution components, and major loads.
Storage for Maintenance: Include a rack or holder, near the operating
instructions, for a copy of maintenance manual.
CONNECTIONS
A.
Cable terminations at switchgear are specified in Division 16 Section "MediumVoltage Cables."
B.
Tighten bus joints, electrical connectors, and terminals according to
manufacturer's published torque-tightening values.
C.
Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."
D.
Connect wiring according to Division 16 Sections "Conductors and Cables" and
"Medium-Voltage Cables."
3.05
FACTORY TESTING
A.
Standard factory tests shall be performed on the equipment under this section.
All tests shall be in accordance with the latest version of ANSI and NEMA
standards.
B.
Factory tests shall be witnessed by SEPTA representative.
C.
The manufacturer shall notify SEPTA two (2) weeks prior to the date the tests
are to be performed
D.
The manufacturer shall include the cost of transportation and lodging for up to
two (2) owner’s representatives. The cost of meals and incidental expenses
shall be the owner’s responsibility
E.
The manufacturer shall provide three (3) certified copies of factory test reports.
3.06
A.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Prepare for acceptance tests as follows:
MEDIUM-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
16341 - 9
July 28, 2016
1.
2.
B.
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Test insulation resistance for each switchgear bus, component,
connecting supply, and feeder
Test continuity of each circuit with a low resistance ohm meter.
Manufacturer's Field Service:
Engage
representative to perform the following:
1.
2.
3.
Revision No. 1
a
factory-authorized
service
Inspect switchgear, wiring, components, connections, and equipment
installation.
Assist in field testing of equipment
Report results in writing.
C.
Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency
to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
D.
Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1.
Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated
in NETA ATS. Certify compliance with test parameters. Perform NETA
tests and inspections for each of the following NETA categories:
a.
b.
Switchgear.
Surge arresters.
E.
Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
F.
Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days
after Final Acceptance, perform infrared scan of each switchgear. Remove
front and rear panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable
scanner.
1.
2.
3.
3.07
A.
Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared
scan of each switchgear 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.
Instrument: Use an infrared-scanning device designed to measure
temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values.
Provide calibration record for device.
Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies
switchgear checked and that describes infrared-scanning results. Include
notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations
after remedial action.
CLEANING
On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of switchgear.
Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning.
Repair damaged finishes.
MEDIUM-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
16341 - 10
July 28, 2016
3.08
A.
3.09
A.
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
PROTECTION
Temporary Heating:
Apply temporary heat to switchgear, according to
manufacturer's written instructions, throughout periods when switchgear
environment is not controlled for temperature and humidity within
manufacturer's stipulated service conditions.
DEMONSTRATION
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train SEPTA's
maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain switchgear. Refer to
Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training."
END OF SECTION
MEDIUM-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
16341 - 11
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
SECTION 16600
OVERHEAD CONTACT SYSTEM
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A. This Section covers the general requirements consisting of all labor, materials
and equipment necessary to furnish, fabricate and install the overhead contact
system (OCS or catenary), aerial feeders and static wires including their support
structures and the services required by the Contractor according to the Contract
Documents.
B. The scope of work is to complete an overhead contact system for the yard tracks
specified in the Frazer Shop and Yard Expansion Contract 2 including any
required modification to the existing OCS arrangement. Feeding and support
arrangements shall be suitable for the expansion allocated in Contracts 1 and 3.
The work includes but not limited to the following:
1. Catenary: catenary wires, section insulators, sectionalizing switches, feeders,
jumpers, crossover wires, pull-off assemblies, terminations, in-span
insulators, messenger supports, contact wire registration and related
hardware.
2. Aerial static wires: bonding to new catenary support structures and to pole
foundation.
3. Supporting components such as cantilevers, headspan or cross-spans and
down guys.
4. Catenary poles or structures.
5. Drilled caisson foundations.
C. Perform tests to demonstrate compliance of all elements of the traction power
system with specified requirements and tolerances.
1.02
RELATED SECTIONS
A. Division 1 – General Requirements
B. Section 02367 – Drilled Caissons
C. Section 03300 – Cast-In-Place Concrete
D. Section 05120 – Structural Steel
E. Section 16640 – Grounding and Bonding (12 kV AC)
1.03
REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS
OVERHEAD CONTACT SYSTEM
16600-1
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
A. Unless specified otherwise, the OCS shall be in accordance with the current
edition of the following Codes, Regulations and Standards. Contractor shall
obtain and pay for all required permits.
1. ACI 318
Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete
2. AISC
Manual of Steel Construction, 14th edition
3. AISI
American Iron and Steel Institute
4. AREMA
American Railway Engineering and Maintenance-of-Way
Association
5. ASCE/SEI 7
Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other
Structures
6. ASTM
American Society for Testing and Materials
7. AWS D1.1
American Welding Society Structural Welding Code-Steel
8. OSHA
Occupational Safety and Health Administration
9. NFPA
National Fire Protection Association
10. NESC
National Electrical Safety Code
11. SEPTA
Structural Design Criteria and Guidelines
12. SEPTA
Structural Engineering Right of Way Design and
Construction Standards
13. Overhead Contact System Design Criteria.
14. All applicable laws, ordinances and requirements of the local Municipality.
15. Clearance requirements of Pennsylvania Public Utility Commission.
1.04
SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
A. Catenary fittings, insulators and hardware shall be suitable for the application
and shall have a proven record of performance on SEPTA or similar electrical
railroads.
B. Catenary assembly shall be compatible with the existing system of the yard.
C. The following design parameters shall be maintained:
1. Design electrical insulation: 150kV BIL
2. Design Voltage: 12 kV AC at 25 Hertz, nominal.
1.05
NOTED RESTRICTIONS
A. Some installations and operations require de-energization of certain electric
power facilities including railroad traction power system.
B. Contractor shall provide a staging plan with construction sequence for SEPTA
approval.
OVERHEAD CONTACT SYSTEM
16600-2
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
C. In general, all existing wires shall be treated as live. Outages shall be
coordinated between Contractor and SEPTA electric traction personnel under
Railroad procedures.
D. At the completion of each track or power outage the overhead catenary shall be
capable of normal electric train operation. The power supply for traction power
feeders shall be normalized through existing feeders, new feeders or the
combination of the two, at the end of each outage.
E. Do not interrupt services or systems unless authorized by SEPTA Project
Manager.
F. Contractor shall reuse, subject to SEPTA approval any replaced or removed
existing poles to the greatest extend as possible. All reused poles shall be
refurbished as required.
G. All work shall be carried out only with the full coordination and assistance of
SEPTA.
1.06
SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01300.
B. Shop drawings or catalog cuts indicating overall dimensions and weight,
mounting details and installation instructions shall be submitted to SEPTA for
review and approval.
C. At least thirty days prior to commencing the work, the catenary Installer shall
submit for review and approval an OCS Installation Plan. The plan shall indicate
the methods, procedures, and equipment proposed for installing the overhead
contact system and include an installation schedule.
D. The catenary Installer shall submit for review and approval a Compliance Testing
Program. The program shall indicate the methods, procedures, and equipment
proposed for testing the overhead contact system.
E. The catenary Installer shall submit all compliance testing results in a format
agreed with SEPTA Project Manager.
F. Reports on catenary testing program to include the following requirements and
as further covered in the specifications:
1. Acceptance measurements.
2. Visual inspection of completed new and modified catenaries.
3. Clearance envelope tests for pantograph and vehicle.
4. Electric tests.
5. Live line testing with trains.
1.07
DELIVERABLES
A. Installation, Testing and Maintenance Manual.
OVERHEAD CONTACT SYSTEM
16600-3
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
B. Factory Test Report.
C. Warranty Certificate.
D. Field Test Report.
E. Acceptance Test Report.
F. As Built Drawings.
1.08
APPEARANCE OF COMPLETED INSTALLATION
A. Ensure that the completed OCS has a neat and attractive appearance, with
minimum adverse impact on fixed facilities and surrounding areas, after all
components, equipment, and hardware are installed in place and final adjustment
made. New OCS system shall have the same appearance as the existing OCS
system insofar possible.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01
GENERAL
A. Products and materials shall comply with the Contract Documents as specified
makes wherever necessary.
B. Products and materials shall be suitable for the intended application, with regard
to rating, listing and labeling.
C. Products and materials shall be new, and recent manufacture.
D. Equipment, materials, and accessories shall be furnished of same type and
dimension as specified in the Design Drawings and/or of same type used in the
existing installations.
2.02
MATERIALS
A. Wires
1. Messenger wire:
5/8” diameter copperweld, Type E or 19 No. 9 Bronze.
2. Contact/Trolley:
4/0 solid grooved bronze.
3. Hangers – clips:
0.34” diameter class B bronze rod.
4. Headspan wire:
9/16” copperweld, 19 no. 9.
5. Steady Span wire:
7/16” copperweld, 7 no. 7.
6. Static wire:
2/0 hard drawn copper, 7 strands.
B. Catenary Fittings and Hardware
1. Malleable Iron: ASTM A47, grade 32510; galvanized, ASTM 153.
2. Forged Steel:
ASTM A711 or A668; galvanized, ASTM A153.
3. Cast Iron:
ASTM A518, Corrosion resistant; high-silicone cast.
OVERHEAD CONTACT SYSTEM
16600-4
July 28, 2016
4. Ductile Iron:
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
ASTM A536, grade 60-40-18; galvanized.
5. Bronze Casting: ASTM B148, Alloy C95800 or ASTM B584, Alloy
C90300 or C92200.
6. Bronze Rod:
ASTM B99, Alloy C65100, Temper H01.
7. Stainless Steel: AISI Type 302 or 304.
8. Copper:
ASTM B248 or B249.
9. Fasteners used for grounding and bonding systems shall be high-copper
alloy, Everdur, Durium, Duronze, or silicone bronze or equal.
C. Insulators and Section Insulators
1. Insulators, suspension and in-line shall be porcelain material, unless noted
otherwise.
2. Section Insulator shall be as manufactured by “Flurry” or approved equal.
D. Structural Steel
1. All poles shall be wide flange shape steel ASTM A992 grade 50, with steel
base plates conforming to ASTM A572 grade 50. All other structural steel
shall conform to ASTM A36.
2. All structural steel fasteners shall be high strength bolts, nuts and washers
shall conforming to ASTM A325, type N 7/8” diameter unless noted otherwise.
Nuts and washers shall be ASTM A563 and F436 respectively unless noted
otherwise.
3. Welding electrodes shall be E70xx.
4. All steel shall be hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123 or ASTM
A153. Galvanized coating thickness for structural members shall not be less
than 2.3 oz/sf..
E. Foundation
1. Concrete shall have a compressive strength fc’ = 4,000 psi minimum at 28
days.
2. Foundation reinforcing steel shall be new deformed bars conforming to ASTM
A615 grade 60.
3. Anchor bolts or rods shall be ASTM F1554 grade 36 or 55 weldable steel.
4. Foundation rebars, anchor bolts or rods, embedment plate and attached
hardware shall be hot-dip galvanized.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01
GENERAL
A. Transmit submittals and deliverables as required.
OVERHEAD CONTACT SYSTEM
16600-5
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
B. Furnish products as indicated.
C. Ensure that substrates are in suitable condition to receive the work.
3.02
SAFETY
A. Conform to SEPTA safety requirements.
B. Prior to working on or near any normally energized wire, in the presence of a
qualified SEPTA electric traction employee, determine that the circuit is deenergized and properly grounded.
3.03
MODIFICATIONS
A. Perform all foundation work and steel erection including structural and small
parts, and make all steel and fitting modifications on the existing structure
arrangement. Install new static wire and ground all new structures effectively.
B. Provide new messenger support assemblies, steady arm assemblies, all fittings
and hardware.
C. Provide support assemblies, insulators and fittings for catenary.
D. Reprofile and realign catenary as required.
E. Remove and dispose of all existing redundant and abandoned equipment.
3.04
INSTALLATION OF POLE AND FOUNDATION
A. Perform all the foundation work per specification Section 02367, Drilled
Caissons.
B. Steel erection shall conform to the AISC specifications, unless otherwise
specified.
C. Pole shall be set plumb when all the attachments such as cantilevers, headspan,
cross-spans, catenaries, down guys and screw anchors, etc. have been installed
complete.
3.05
STRUCTURE NUMBERING
A. Clearly and permanently number all structures and mount warning signs per
SEPTA requirements
3.06
INSTALLATION OF FEEDER AND STATIC WIRE
A. The installation procedure for the aerial feeder and static wires shall be similar to
that used for the catenary messenger. The conductors shall be pulled out under
tension and must not be allowed to come into contact with vehicles or the
ground.
B. The ground wire is to be connected to the foundation caisson and vertical rebar
3.07 INSTALLATION OF CATENARY
OVERHEAD CONTACT SYSTEM
16600-6
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
A. Following the installation of the new support structures, assemblies and down
guys, Catenary Installer shall install the individual tension lengths of catenary by
stringing the conductors and installing the hardware, in-span insulators and the
section insulators in accordance with the Design Drawings and this Specification.
This work shall be undertaken in concert with an agreed Overhead Contact
System Installation Plan.
B. The individual tension lengths of catenary conductor shall be pulled out under
tension. During the stringing process the conductor shall not come into contact
with either the ground or any work vehicle.
C. Care shall be taken to avoid kinking, twisting and other damage during
tensioning. Particular care shall be taken to ensure the wires do not become
birdcaged or abraded in any way.
D. Splices are to be minimized in all overhead conductors and if unavoidable, must
have the approval of SEPTA Project Manager.
E. After final adjustment of the catenary, turnbuckles and other adjustable fasteners
shall be at their median position to provide for future maintenance.
F. Section insulators are to be installed as depicted in the positions shown on the
Design Drawings and in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
G. Catenary Installer shall adjust the length of the supporting hangers for the section
insulator assemblies to insure that the frame and runners for these assemblies
are set parallel to the plane of the top of the rail.
H. Catenary Installer shall check the contact wire profiles and insure a smooth
pantograph take-over across the section insulators.
3.08
GROUNDING SYSTEM
A. The integrity of the OCS Grounding System shall be maintained at all times.
B. Install grounding system as indicated in the Design Drawings.
C. Install bonding between poles and pole foundations and rails as indicated in the
Design Drawings.
3.09
INSTALLATION TOOLS
A. Catenary Installer shall provide and maintain sufficient tools, mechanical
equipment and apparatus necessary to complete the work in accordance with the
Design Drawings and an agreed Overhead Contact System Installation Plan.
This equipment shall include suitable dynamometers or other measuring devices
which will accommodate a minimum of 7,500 pounds tension and are calibrated
in increments of not more than 50 pounds. Catenary Installer shall also provide
suitable high-grade contact thermometers for measuring the conductor
temperatures in the section where the conductors are being tensioned and any
special tools recommended by the manufacturer for installing the section
insulators.
OVERHEAD CONTACT SYSTEM
16600-7
July 28, 2016
3.10
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES
A. The following construction tolerances shall not be exceeded, except at the
discretion of SEPTA Project Manager.
1. Cantilever along Track Offset:
+/- 3 inches
2. Hanger Length:
+/- 1 inches
3. Hanger Spacing:
+/- 6 inches
4. System Height:
+/- 1 inches
5. Stagger:
+/- 1 inches
6. Contact Wire Locations:
Lateral
Vertical
a. Railroad Crossings:
+/- 2 inches
+/- 1 inch
b. Overlap Locations
+/- 1 inch
+/- 2 inches
c. All other Locations:
+/- 2 inches
+/- 2 inches
7. Catenary support structures:
Transverse
Longitudinal
+/- 2 inches
+/- 12 inches
(Between parallel wires):
8. Stagger shall be the perpendicular distance from the contact wire to the track
centerline, projected normal to the plane of the track to the height of the
contact wire.
3.11
INTERFACE WITH EXISTING SYSTEM
A. Install OCS in interface area as indicated in the Design Drawings.
B. Perform Work of tie-ins and installation of additional foundations and structures
during hours specified and as approved by SEPTA.
C. Remove and deliver existing deadend and catenary support poles to SEPTA.
D. Remove and dispose of existing pole foundations and downguy foundations
down to five (5) feet below grade.
E. Backfill and compact in areas of removal and new structures.
F. Align and test interface area as indicated in the Design Drawings.
G. Clean and restore site.
3.12
RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Provide shop drawings with detailed equipment drawings for each type of
catenary assembly installed.
B. Furnish as built layout drawings representing the final installed locations of the
catenary assemblies and cable routing.
OVERHEAD CONTACT SYSTEM
16600-8
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
C. Provide recorded catenary assembly drawings with detail equipment, details for
each type of catenary assembly installed.
3.13
TEST REPORTS
A. Submit six certified copies of test reports and all field tests as indicated in the
Contract Documents.
3.14
COMPLIANCE TESTING
A. Catenary Installer shall perform compliance testing of the overhead contact
system witnessed by SEPTA Project Manager in accordance with an agreed
Compliance Testing Program.
B. All compliance test results shall be recorded and promptly submitted to SEPTA
Project Manager in the agreed format.
C. Mechanical properties tested shall include:
1. Support structure setting elevations.
2. Pole vertical tolerances.
3. Catenary hanger lengths.
4. Catenary hanger locations.
5. Contact wire heights.
6. Contact wire staggers.
7. Catenary system heights.
D. A catenary height and stagger gauge will be provided by the Catenary Installer
for performance of the compliance testing.
END OF SECTION
OVERHEAD CONTACT SYSTEM
16600-9
July 28, 2016
Frazer Shop & Yard Expansion
Revision No. 1
This page is intentionally left blank
OVERHEAD CONTACT SYSTEM
16600-10
Download